72/6890 msd hardware manual (05972-90026) · hardware manual iq72.bk : title page 3 tuesday, july...

356
H Hardware Manual HP 5972A & HP 6890 Series Mass Selective Detectors

Upload: vukhanh

Post on 06-Sep-2018

355 views

Category:

Documents


11 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

H

Hardware Manual

HP 5972A & HP 6890 Series Mass Selective Detectors

iq72.bk : cover Page 1 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 2: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

Copyright 1995Hewlett-Packard Company

All Rights Reserved.Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws.

Document History

Publication number05972-90026

First edition, 4/95Printed in USA

Warranty

The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.

Hewlett-Packard makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.

Hewlett-Packard shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance or use of this material.

Hewlett-Packard assumes no responsibility for the use or reliability of its software on equipment that is not furnished by Hewlett-Packard.

Safety Information

Safety class

The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series Mass Selective Detectors (MSD) are Safety Class I instruments and have been designed and tested in accordance with IEC Publication 348, Safety Requirements for Electronic Measuring Apparatus (HD401)

WARNING

Connecting an MSD to a power source which is not equipped with a protective earth contact creates a shock hazard for the operator and can damage the instrument. Likewise, interrupting the protective conductor inside or outside the MSD or disconnecting the protective earth terminal creates a shock hazard for the operator and can damage the instrument.

WARNING

Make sure that only fuses with the required current rating and of the specified type are used for replacement. The use of incorrect or makeshift fuses or the short-circuiting of fuse holders creates a shock hazard for the operator and can damage the instrument.

WARNING

Any adjustment, maintenance or repair of the opened instrument while it is connected to a power source should be avoided if possible and, if required, should be carried out only by trained persons who are aware of the hazards involved.

Noise Declaration

Deutsch

LpA << 70 dB am Arbeitsplatz normaler Betrieb nach EN 27779:1991

English

LpA << 70 dB operator position normal operation per ISO 7779:1988

Instrument

Identification

The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series MSDs are identified with a 10-character serial number on a label located on the back of the instrument.

The first four characters are the serial prefix. The fifth character is the country of origin:

A = USAG = Germany

The last five characters are an identification number unique to each instrument.

When corresponding with Hewlett-Packard about your instrument, be sure to include the model number and the full 10-character serial number.

Write the serial number of your MSD here for reference:

Serial #:

________________________

Manual Conventions

Cautions

Cautions call attention to procedures which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in damage to

the instrument.

Warnings

Warnings call attention to procedures which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in personal

injury.

Part Numbers

In this manual, Hewlett-Packard part numbers are generally listed in parentheses after the name of the part or in tables in the Parts chapter. Most Hewlett-Packard part numbers are either four-digit-by-four-digit (1234-1234) numbers or five-digit-by-five-digit (12345-12345) numbers.

A few tools and supplies listed have no part numbers and are not available from Hewlett-Packard. Most of these can be obtained from laboratory supply companies.

iq72.bk : legal Page 2 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 3: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

HP 5972A and HP 6890 SeriesMass Selective Detectors

Hardware Manual

iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 4: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4

The HP 5972A and HP 6890 SeriesMass Selective Detectors

The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series Mass Selective Detectors (MSDs) are stand-alone, capillary GC detectors. The HP 6890 Series MSD is designed for use with an HP 6890 Series Gas Chromatograph. The HP 5972A MSD is designed for use with an HP 5890 Gas Chromatograph.

Both MSDs feature:

• Machined aluminum vacuum manifold

• Vapor-diffusion, high vacuum pump

• Mechanical foreline pump

• Electron-ionization ion source

• Hyperbolic quadrupole mass filter

• Electron multiplier

• Instrument control electronics

• Power supplies

• GC interface

The differences between the two MSDs are minor

The primary difference between the two MSDs is in the GC interface. The heater in the GC interface of the HP 6890 Series MSD is powered by 40 V dc electricity from an HP 6890 Series GC. The heater in the GC interface of the HP 5972A MSD is powered by 110 V ac electricity from an HP 5890 GC. The upper cover on the HP 6890 Series MSD includes a sheetmetal extension that ensures the MSD is the proper distance from the GC. In all other respects, the two MSDs are essentially identical.

iq72.bk : intro Page 4 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 5: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series Mass Selective Detectors

5

HP 6890 SeriesGas Chromatograph

HP 6890 SeriesMass Selective Detector

HP 5890 Gas Chromatograph

HP 5972A Mass Selective Detector

iq72.bk : intro Page 5 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 6: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

6

The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series Mass Selective Detectors

Operator interaction with the MSD is through the data system

The data system features Hewlett-Packard MS ChemStation software. It includes programs to calibrate (tune) the MSD, acquire data, and analyze the data. Tuning programs adjust voltages in the ion source, calibrate mass assignments, and control the scanning of the analyzer. Data acquisition programs allow you to monitor the total ion current, automatically storing the mass spectra of GC peaks as they elute (scan mode), or to monitor the concentrations of particular ions (selected ion monitoring mode (SIM)). Data analysis programs allow you to integrate chromatograms, generate ion chromatograms, view and manipulate mass spectral data, compare spectra to databases of reference spectra, and generate reports.

The MSD has several options and accessories

Options and accessories for the MSD include:

• HP 59864A Gauge Controller for measuring vacuum manifold (high vacuum) pressure. The gauge controller is connected to the triode gauge supplied on the MSD.

• HP 59765A GC/IRD/MSD Interface for interfacing the MSD with both an HP 5890 GC and an HP 5965 Infrared Detector (IRD). This interface is not compatible with the HP 6890 Series MSD and GC.

• HP G1072B CI Accessory which enables the MSD to perform chemical ionization analyses. It includes a new ion source and parts for modifying the GC interface.

• HP 59913A Jet Separator (glass jet) for connecting packed columns and large-diameter capillary columns to the MSD. The jet separator provides sample enrichment as well as reduction of total flow into the MSD. The HP 59913A Jet Separator is not currently compatible with the HP 6890 Series MSD and GC.

iq72.bk : intro Page 6 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 7: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series Mass Selective Detectors

7

• HP 59913B Jet Separator (glass-lined metal jet) for connecting megabore (0.53-mm id) capillary columns to the MSD. The jet separator provides sample enrichment as well as reduction of total flow into the MSD. The HP 59913B Jet Separator is not currently compatible with the HP 6890 Series MSD and GC.

Installation and operation of the HP 59864A Gauge Controller is described in this manual. The GC/IRD/MSD interface, CI accessory, and jet separators are supplied with their own individual manuals.

iq72.bk : intro Page 7 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 8: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

8

In This Manual

Chapters 1 – 4 describe common operating, troubleshooting, and maintenance procedures for the HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series Mass Selective Detectors. Chapters 5 – 8 contain theory of operation and reference material. Chapter 9 is a parts reference.

The HP 6890 Series MSD and HP 6890 Series GC are shown in most of the illustrations in this manual. Most of the procedures, however, apply equally to the HP 5972A MSD and HP 5890 GC. Tasks that are significantly different for the two GC/MSD systems are duplicated with a separate procedure for each system.

Currently, the HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series MSDs are controlled by different versions of the MS ChemStation software. Also, the software is revised periodically. Therefore, if descriptions of the software in this manual do not match your software precisely, refer to the online help or manuals supplied with your software.

Refer to the manuals supplied with your gas chromatograph for detailed instructions on setting up, operating, and maintaining your GC.

iq72.bk : intro Page 8 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 9: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

9

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Installing GC Columns

How to connect GC columns to the MSD, 17

To condition a capillary column, 22To install a capillary-direct column, 24To install a splitter in an HP 5890 GC, 26To install a splitter in an HP 6890 Series GC, 28To install a wide-bore (0.32-mm id) column, 30To install a megabore (0.53-mm id) column, 32

Chapter 2 Operating the MSD

How to perform some basic operating procedures for the MSD, 35

To pump down the MSD, 40To monitor the foreline pressure, 42To connect the gauge controller, 44To monitor vacuum manifold pressure, 46To set the GC interface temperature from an HP 5890 GC, 48To set the GC interface temperature from an HP 6890 GC, 50To set the GC interface temperature from the ChemStation, 52To measure column flow, 54To tune the MSD, 56To vent the MSD, 58To move or store the MSD, 60

iq72.bk : iq72.toc Page 9 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 10: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

10

Contents

Chapter 3 Troubleshooting the MSD

How to find and correct problems in your MSD, 63

Symptoms, 65

If the MSD does not turn on, 70If the MSD is on but the fan is not operating, 71If the MSD is on but the foreline pump is not operating, 72If the MSD is on but the status LEDs are all blinking, 73

If the relative abundance (percentage) of m/z 502 is lower than expected, 74If peak widths are inconsistent (narrow or wide peak at m/z 219), 76If peak widths are < 0.45 amu or > 0.65 amu, 78If mass spectra show excessive, periodic noise, 79If isotopes are missing or isotope ratios are incorrect, 80If mass spectra show high background, 82If there are peaks at m/z 18, 28, and 32, 83If no peaks are present, 84If sensitivity is low, 88If repeatability is poor, 90If high-mass sensitivity is poor, 92If mass assignments are incorrect, 94

If the foreline or vacuum manifold pressure is too low, 95If the foreline or vacuum manifold pressure is too high, 96If the gauge controller displays 9.9+9 and then goes blank, 98If the power indicator on the gauge controller does not light, 100

If the analyzer temperature is too low, 102If the GC interface does not heat up, 104

Cannot achieve constant peak widths, 106Difficulty in the mass filter electronics, 108Difficulty with the detector HV supply, 109The diffusion pump is or was too hot, 110The diffusion pump is too cold, 112The foreline pressure has exceeded 300 mTorr, 116Mass spectrometer interface card is not active, 118MS does not respond, 119No peaks found, 120There is no emission current, 121There is not enough signal to begin the tune, 122

iq72.bk : iq72.toc Page 10 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 11: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

Contents

11

Finding air leaks, 124

Step 1. To confirm the presence of a leak, 125Step 2. To isolate the source of a leak, 126Step 3. To find an air leak in the GC, 127Step 4. To find an air leak in the MSD, 128

To correct a column nut leak, 130To correct a manifold O-ring leak, 131To correct a leak in a KF fitting, 132To correct a leak in the triode gauge fitting, 133To correct a calibration valve leak, 134

Checking for contamination, 136

To find the source of contamination in a GC, 138To find the source of contamination in an MSD, 139

Testing, 141

To test the filaments, 142To test HP-IB communications, 144To test the HP-IB/MS control card, 145To test GC and ALS communications, 147To test the power supply, 148To test the calibration valve, 152To test the diffusion pump, 154To test the ion source, 156

iq72.bk : iq72.toc Page 11 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 12: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

12

Contents

Chapter 4 Maintaining the MSD

How to perform common maintenance procedures for the MSD, 159

Before starting, 160

Maintaining the vacuum system, 167

To check and add foreline pump fluid, 168To drain the foreline pump, 170To fill the foreline pump, 172To remove the foreline trap pellets, 174To add foreline trap pellets, 176To remove the diffusion pump, 178To check the diffusion pump fluid, 180To replace the diffusion pump fluid, 182To reinstall the diffusion pump fluid, 184To remove the calibration vial, 186To fill and reinstall the calibration vial, 188To remove the foreline gauge, 190To reinstall the foreline gauge, 192To remove the calibration valve, 194To reinstall the calibration valve, 196To remove the triode gauge tube, 198To reinstall a triode gauge tube, 200

Maintaining the analyzer, 202

To remove the analyzer, 204To reinstall the analyzer, 206To remove the ion source, 208To disassemble the ion source, 210To clean the ion source, 212To reassemble the ion source, 216To reinstall the ion source, 218To remove a filament, 220To reinstall a filament, 222To remove the electron multiplier horn, 224To reinstall the electron multiplier horn, 226

iq72.bk : iq72.toc Page 12 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 13: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

Contents

13

Maintaining the GC interface, 229

To remove the heater/sensor assembly (HP 5972A), 230To reinstall the heater/sensor assembly (HP 5972A), 232To remove the heater/sensor assembly (HP 6890 Series), 234To reinstall the heater/sensor assembly (HP 6890 Series), 236

Maintaining the electronics, 238

To replace the top board, 239To adjust the RF coils, 240To replace the main board, 241To replace the HP-IB/MS control card, 242To remove the electronics panel, 243To reinstall the electronics panel, 244To replace the power distribution board, 245To replace the power supply fuse, 246To replace the power supply, 247To replace the diffusion pump fuses, 248

Chapter 5 Vacuum System

This chapter describes components of the vacuum system in the MSD, 249

Vacuum manifold, 252Top plate, 253Vacuum seals, 254

Manifold O-ring, 254KF seals, 254Calibration valve O-rings, 254Triode gauge seal, 254

Foreline pump and trap, 256Foreline gauge, 258Diffusion pump and fan, 260Calibration valve, 264Triode gauge tube, 266Gauge controller, 268

iq72.bk : iq72.toc Page 13 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 14: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

14

Contents

Chapter 6 GC Interface

This chapter describes the function of the GC interface, 271

Chapter 7 Analyzer

This chapter describes the analyzer, 275

Radiator, 278Ion source, 280

Ion source body, 280Filaments, 280

Filament emission, 280Filament selection, 282

Repeller, 282Drawout plate and cylinder, 282Ion focus, 283Entrance lens, 283

Entrance lens gain, 283Entrance lens offset, 283

Mass filter, 284Dc polarity, 285AMU gain, 285AMU offset, 285219 width, 285

Electron multiplier, 287X-ray lens, 288Electron multiplier horn, 288

iq72.bk : iq72.toc Page 14 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 15: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

Contents

15

Chapter 8 Electronics

This chapter describes how the MSD electronics work, 289

Top board, 292RF amplifier, 293Dc amplifiers, 297High voltage supply, 298Thermocouple amplifier, 298Alternate filament relay, 298Feedthrough connections, 298

Main board, 299Accessory control, 305

Input lines, 306Output lines, 307Other lines, 307

HP-IB/MS control card, 308Instrument controller, 308Data processor, 308Main processor, 309Serial communication processor, 309HP-IB controller, 310Remote control processor, 310Interfacing to external devices, 311

Power supply, 312Power distribution board, 312Connectors and controls, 314

APG remote connector, 314I/O connector, 314Accessory connector, 314Ac power cord, 314Power switch, 315Foreline pump power cord receptacle, 315

Status display, 316Power status LED, 317Analyzer status LED, 317Cal valve status LED, 317

Parallel/remote board & cable (HP 5890 GC only), 318

iq72.bk : iq72.toc Page 15 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 16: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

16

Contents

Chapter 9 Parts

This chapter lists parts that can be ordered for your MSD, 319

Electronics, 322Vacuum system, 326Analyzer, 330GC interface, 334Consumables and maintenance supplies, 338

Index, 343

iq72.bk : iq72.toc Page 16 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 17: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

1

Installing GC Columns

How to connect GC columns to the MSD

To condition a capillary column, 22To install a capillary-direct column, 24To install a splitter in an HP 5890 GC, 26To install a splitter in an HP 6890 Series GC, 28To install a wide-bore (0.32-mm id) column, 30To install a megabore (0.53-mm id) column, 32

iq72.bk : chapter1 Page 17 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 18: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

18

Installing GC columns

Before you can operate your GC/MSD system, you must select, condition, and install a GC column. This chapter will show you how to condition and install a column.

Many types of GC columns can be used with the MSD but there are

some restrictions

The rate of column flow into the MSD should not exceed 2.0 ml/minute during tuning or data acquisition. Optimum sensitivity generally occurs at 1.0 ml/minute or less. Therefore, there are limits to column length and flow.

• Narrow-bore columns (0.20 mm id, 0.30 mm od) can be installed directly into the GC interface.

• Wide-bore columns (0.32 mm id, 0.44 mm od) that are 50 meters long or longer can be installed directly into the GC interface. Some flow restrictions apply. Wide-bore columns of any length can be used if an effluent splitter is also installed.

• Megabore columns (0.53 mm id, 0.70 mm od) cannot be installed directly into the GC interface. Megabore columns of any length can be used if an effluent splitter or jet separator is also installed.

• Packed columns can be used only with a jet separator.

This information is summarized in Table 1. The dimensions listed are nominal values. The velocities and flows listed are calculated values at 70°C. Actual values can vary from column to column and vary greatly with oven temperature. See To measure column flow on page 54 for instructions on how to measure actual flow in your column.

iq72.bk : chapter1 Page 18 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 19: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

1 Installing GC Columns

19

Table 1 GC column information

Column diameter (mm)1

Column length (meters)1

Injection port type

Interface type

Head pressure (psi)

Linear velocity (cm/sec)2

Column flow(ml/min)2

0.100 10 C CD 25.5 30 0.224

0.200 12 C CD 3 44 0.5825 C CD 10.4 30 0.5650 C CD 35.5 30 1.12

0.250 30 C CD 15 46.2 1.60

0.32 30 C CD 3.5 46.3 1.60(wide-bore) 50 C CD 4.9 30 1.12

50 C ES 15.3 30 2.00

0.53 30 C,P ES/JET 3.2 30 3.85(megabore) 60 C,P ES/JET 6.5 30 4.27

90 C,P ES/JET 9.9 30 4.71

1 Nominal dimensions2 Calculated values at 70 °C with vacuum compensation turned on except for ES/JET which were

calculated with vacuum compensation turned off

C = Capillary (split/splitless injection port)CD = Capillary directES = Effluent splitterJET = HP 59913A/B Jet SeparatorsP = Packed-column injection port

iq72.bk : chapter1 Page 19 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 20: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

20

1 Installing GC Columns

Effluent splitters reduce the flow into the MSD

An effluent splitter vents part of the GC sample to atmosphere. This reduces the amount of sample entering the MSD. When an effluent splitter is used, the GC column is connected to the splitter. A restrictor (a special ultra-narrow 0.115 mm id capillary column) connects the splitter to the GC interface. Installation of an effluent splitter is described on pages 26 and 28.

A jet separator reduces flow and is more selective

A jet separator also reduces flow into the MSD. It preferentially sends heavier molecules into the MSD, so that an enrichment occurs (more sample enters the MSD relative to the amount of carrier gas). A short piece of capillary column connects the jet separator to the GC interface.

Two jet separators are available. The HP 59913A has a glass jet. The HP 59913B has a glass-lined metal jet. Currently, both jet separators are compatible only with the HP 5890 GC. Each jet separator includes a manual that describes how to install it in an HP 5890 GC.

Conditioning a column before it is installed into the GC interface

is essential

A small portion of the capillary column stationary phase is often carried away by the carrier gas. This is called column bleed. Column bleed deposits traces of the stationary phase in the MSD ion source. This decreases MSD performance and makes cleaning of the ion source necessary.

Column bleed is most common in new or poorly cross-linked columns. It is much worse if there are traces of oxygen in the carrier gas when the column is heated.

iq72.bk : chapter1 Page 20 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 21: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

1 Installing GC Columns

21

To minimize column bleed, all capillary columns should be conditioned before they are installed in the GC interface or in a splitter or jet separator. Conditioning consists of:

1. Purging the carrier gas lines2. Baking the column for several hours while flowing carrier gas through it

The temperature used is typically 10°C above the maximum temperature you expect to use for analyses.

Instructions for conditioning a capillary column are included in this chapter.

Conditioning ferrules is also beneficial

New ferrules tend to loosen after a few heating cycles in the GC oven. This can result in leaks. Heating ferrules to their maximum expected operating temperature for several hours before they are installed can minimize subsequent loosening. It also reduces possible chemical bleed from the ferrules.

C A U T I O N Do not exceed the maximum temperature rating of the column.

iq72.bk : chapter1 Page 21 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 22: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

22

1 Installing GC Columns

To condition a capillary column

To condition a capillary column

Materials needed:

Carrier gas, (ultra-pure)Ferrules, injection port

0.27-mm id, for 0.1-mm id columns (5062-3518)0.37-mm id, for 0.2-mm id columns (5062-3516)0.40-mm id, for 0.25-mm id columns (5181-3523)0.47-mm id, for 0.32-mm id columns (5062-3514)0.74-mm id, for 0.53-mm id columns (5062-3512)

GC columnNut, injection port (18740-20870)Wrench, open-end, 1/4-inch × 5/16-inch (8710-0510)

1 Install one end of the column in the injection port. Use a ferrule that has been conditioned.

CAUTION Do not exceed the maximum temperature rating of the column.

2 Allow the carrier gas to flow through the column for 5 minutes without heating the GC oven.

3 Ramp the oven temperature at 5°C/minute to 10°C above your highest analytical temperature.

iq72.bk : chapter1 Page 22 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 23: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

1 Installing GC Columns

To condition a capillary column

23

4 Hold this temperature. Allow the carrier gas to flow for several hours.

5 Return the column to a low standby temperature.

For more information about installing a capil-lary column, refer to pages 6 and 7 of the Hewlett-Packard application note:

Optimizing splitless injections on your GC

for high performance MS analysis

(5091-4587E).

iq72.bk : chapter1 Page 23 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 24: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

24

1 Installing GC Columns

To install a capillary-direct column

To install a capillary-direct column

Materials needed:

Ferrules0.3-mm id, for 0.1-mm id columns (5062-3507)0.4-mm id, for 0.2-mm id columns (5062-3508)0.5-mm id, for 0.32-mm id columns (5062-3506)

Gloves, cleanlarge (8650-0030)small (8650-0029)

Nut, column (05988-20066)Wrench, open-end, 1/4-inch × 5/16-inch (8710-0510)

1 Condition the column as described on page 22.

2 Slide a nut and conditioned ferrule onto the free end of the GC column.

3 Score and break off the first 30 mm of the column. Make sure the break is even.

30 mm

iq72.bk : chapter1 Page 24 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 25: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

1 Installing GC Columns

To install a capillary-direct column

25

4 Slide the column into the GC interface until it stops (about 20 cm).

5 Hand tighten the nut.

6 Withdraw the column 1 mm. 7 Tighten the nut 1/4 to 1/2 turn. Old ferrules need less tightening than new ones.

1 mm

iq72.bk : chapter1 Page 25 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 26: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

26

1 Installing GC Columns

To install a splitter in an HP 5890 GC

To install a splitter in an HP 5890 GC

Materials needed:

Aluminum foil, cleanClamp, for vent tube (05988-00081)Gloves, clean

large (8650-0030)small (8650-0029)

Mounting plate, HP 5890 GC (05988-00080)Nut, short (2740-0015)Screwdriver, Pozidriv #2 (8710-0900)Sealing ring (0905-0938)Tee connector (05995-20174)Vent tube (1530-2163)Wrench, open-end, 1/4-inch × 5/16-inch (8710-0510)

1 Remove the blank plate from the rear detector port of the GC.

2 Cover the end of the vent tube with foil. Push it up through the insulation in the roof of the GC oven.

3 Install the mounting plate over the rear detector port.

iq72.bk : chapter1 Page 26 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 27: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

1 Installing GC Columns

To install a splitter in an HP 5890 GC

27

WARNING The gases exiting the vent tube are your carrier gas and sample. They may be dangerous and should never be vented directly into your laboratory.

4 Fasten the clamp over the vent tube. Route the vent tube outside or to a fume hood.

5 Install the tee connector on the oven end of the vent tube. Tighten the nut.

6 The vent tube should not protrude too far into the tee connector.

iq72.bk : chapter1 Page 27 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 28: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

28

1 Installing GC Columns

To install a splitter in an HP 6890 Series GC

To install a splitter in an HP 6890 Series GC

Materials needed:

Aluminum foil, cleanClamp, for vent tube (05988-00081)Gloves, clean

large (8650-0030)small (8650-0029)

Mounting plate, HP 6890 GC (05972-00017)Nut, short (2740-0015)Pliers, side-cutting (8710-0006)Screwdriver, Pozidriv #2 (8710-0900)Sealing ring (0905-0938)Tee connector (05995-20174)Vent tube (1530-2163)Wrench, open-end, 1/4-inch × 5/16-inch (8710-0510)

1 Use side-cutting pliers to remove the blank plate from the rear detector port of the GC.

2 Cover the end of the vent tube with foil. Push it up through the insulation in the roof of the GC oven.

3 Install the mounting plate over the rear detector port.

iq72.bk : chapter1 Page 28 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 29: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

1 Installing GC Columns

To install a splitter in an HP 6890 Series GC

29

WARNING The gases exiting the vent tube are your carrier gas and sample. They may be dangerous and should never be vented directly into your laboratory.

4 Fasten the clamp over the vent tube. Route the vent tube outside or to a fume hood.

5 Install the tee connector on the oven end of the vent tube. Tighten the nut.

6 The vent tube should not protrude too far into the tee connector.

iq72.bk : chapter1 Page 29 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 30: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

30

1 Installing GC Columns

To install a wide-bore (0.32-mm id) column

To install a wide-bore (0.32-mm id) column

Materials needed:

Ferrules0.3-mm id, for restrictor, both ends (5062-3507)0.47-mm id, injection port end of column (5062-3514)0.5-mm id, splitter end of column (5062-3506)

Gloves, cleanlarge (8650-0030)small (8650-0029)

NutGC interface and splitter (05988-20066)injection port (18740-20870)

Restrictor, 0.115-mm id (05971-20590)Split tube (05988-20224)Wrench, open-end, 1/4-inch × 5/16-inch (8710-0510)

1 Install the GC column into the injection port. See your GC manual.

2 Condition the column as described on page 22. 3 Install the splitter into the GC oven as described on page 26 or 28.

iq72.bk : chapter1 Page 30 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 31: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

1 Installing GC Columns

To install a wide-bore (0.32-mm id) column

31

4 Install the restrictor column capillary direct into the GC interface (see page 24).

5 Slide the split tube into the tee connector.

6 Connect the restrictor and the GC column to the tee connector. Tighten the nuts.

7 The restrictor column and GC column should not quite meet inside the tee connector.

iq72.bk : chapter1 Page 31 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 32: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

32

1 Installing GC Columns

To install a megabore (0.53-mm id) column

To install a megabore (0.53-mm id) column

Materials needed:

Ferrules0.3-mm id, for restrictor, both ends (5062-3507)0.74-mm id, injection port end of column (5062-3512)0.8-mm id, splitter end of column (5062-3538)

Gloves, cleanlarge (8650-0030)small (8650-0029)

NutGC interface (05988-20066)injection port (18740-20870)

Restrictor, 0.115-mm id (05971-20590)Wrench, open-end, 1/4-inch × 5/16-inch (8710-0510)

1 Install the GC column into the injection port. See your GC manual.

2 Condition the column as described on page 22. 3 Install the splitter into the GC oven as described on page 26 or 28.

iq72.bk : chapter1 Page 32 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 33: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

1 Installing GC Columns

To install a megabore (0.53-mm id) column

33

4 Install the restrictor column capillary direct into the GC interface (see page 24).

5 Connect the restrictor and the GC column to the tee connector. Tighten the nuts.

6 The restrictor column should protrude slightly into the end of the GC column.

iq72.bk : chapter1 Page 33 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 34: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

34

iq72.bk : chapter1 Page 34 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 35: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

2

Operating the MSD

How to perform some basic operating procedures for the MSD

To pump down the MSD, 40To monitor the foreline pressure, 42To connect the gauge controller, 44To monitor vacuum manifold pressure, 46To set the GC interface temperature from an HP 5890 GC, 48To set the GC interface temperature from an HP 6890 GC, 50To set the GC interface temperature from the ChemStation, 52To measure column flow, 54To tune the MSD, 56To vent the MSD, 58To move or store the MSD, 60

chapter2 Page 35 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 1:25 PM

Page 36: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

36

Operating the MSD

Operation of the MSD is primarily from the data system

Except for the main power switch, the MSD has no switches, knobs or other physical controls. You control the MSD through a data system equipped with MS ChemStation software. This includes tasks such as pumpdown, monitoring pressures, setting temperatures, tuning, and venting. These tasks are described in this chapter. It also includes tasks such as data acquisition and data analysis. These tasks are described in the manuals and online help supplied with your data system software.

Different versions of the software control the HP 5972A and

HP 6890 Series MSDs

Currently, HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series MSDs are controlled by different versions of the MS ChemStation software. Both versions feature graphical user interfaces with windows and menus. There are, however, significant differences between them. The procedures in this chapter do not provide details of the software operation. For those details, refer to the manuals and online documentation supplied with your MS ChemStation software.

Some conditions must be met before you turn on the MSD

Verify the following before you turn on or attempt to operate the MSD.

• The MSD is connected to a grounded power source.

• The GC interface is attached to the MSD and extends into the GC oven.

• A capillary column is installed in the GC oven and the GC interface.

• The capillary column was conditioned before it was installed in theGC interface.

• The GC is on, but the heated zone that controls the GC interface is off.

• Carrier gas is flowing through the column.

• The foreline pump is connected to the MSD.

• The foreline pump exhaust is properly vented.

chapter2 Page 36 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 1:25 PM

Page 37: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

2 Operating the MSD

37

The data system helps you pump down the MSD

Pumpdown is mostly automated. Once you turn on the main power switch, the MSD basically pumps down by itself. The data system software contains a program that allows you to monitor pumpdown. It reminds you to turn on the GC interface heater and tells you when your MSD is ready to operate.

Pressure in the MSD can be monitored two ways

All MSDs are equipped with a gauge that measures foreline pressure. Foreline pressure can be monitored only through the data system.

All MSDs are also equipped with a triode gauge tube. If your MSD is equipped with the optional HP 59864A Gauge Controller, the triode gauge can measure the pressure in the vacuum manifold. The high-vacuum pressure monitored by the triode gauge cannot be monitored through the data system. It is displayed by LEDs on the gauge controller.

The gauge controller is calibrated for nitrogen (N2). If you use helium (typical) as a GC carrier gas, the pressure reading on the gauge controller will not be absolutely accurate. The indicated pressure will be lower than the actual pressure by approximately a factor of 6. This difference is not critical. All of the pressures listed in this manual are indicated pressures for helium carrier gas.

W A R N I N G Connecting the MSD to an ungrounded power source creates a shock hazard for the operator and can damage the instrument.

W A R N I N G The exhaust from the foreline pump contains trace amounts of the chemicals you are analyzing. Do not vent the pump exhaust into your laboratory.

chapter2 Page 37 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 1:25 PM

Page 38: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

38

2 Operating the MSD

Temperatures are controlled through the data system

The MSD has one heater. It is located in the GC interface. The GC interface heater is powered by one of the heated zones (heater circuits) in the GC. In the HP 6890 Series MSD, the GC interface is powered by 40 V dc electricity from the auxiliary 2 (Aux 2) heated zone of the HP 6890 Series GC. In the HP 5972A MSD, the GC interface is powered by 120 V ac electricity from either the detector B (Det B) or auxiliary (Aux) heated zone of the HP 5890 GC.

A temperature sensor is located next to the heater. The GC interface temperature can be monitored from the data system or from the GC keypad. The temperature setpoint can also be changed from the data system or from the GC keypad.

The MSD has a second temperature sensor located near the ion source. Its temperature can be monitored only from the data system. In the software, this temperature is labeled MS temperature.

Column flow is set from the GC but can be measured by the MSD

Carrier gas flow through the GC column is controlled by head pressure in the GC. The controls vary depending on which GC you have and how it is equipped. For a given head pressure, the column flow will decrease as the GC oven temperature increases.

The MSD can be used to measure column flow. You inject a small amount of air, inert gas, or an unretained chemical and time how long it takes to reach the MSD. With this time, you can calculate the column flow.

chapter2 Page 38 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 1:25 PM

Page 39: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

2 Operating the MSD

39

The data system aids in venting

Venting must be done correctly. Otherwise, the MSD can be damaged by backstreaming of diffusion pump fluid. A program in the data system guides you through the venting process. It switches off the diffusion pump heater at the correct time. It also lets you monitor temperatures in the MSD and indicates when to vent the MSD.

If you plan to move your MSD, or if it will remain vented for an extended time, a few additional precautions are required.

The MSD can still be vented if the data system is not working correctly. Disconnecting the blue foreline connector from the foreline gauge turns off the diffusion pump heater. After 10 minutes, the MSD can be switched off and the column removed from the GC interface.

C A U T I O N Removing the column from the GC interface is the only correct way to allow air into the vacuum manifold.

W A R N I N G Make sure the GC interface is cool before you remove the column.

chapter2 Page 39 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 1:25 PM

Page 40: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

40

2 Operating the MSD

To pump down the MSD

To pump down the MSD

Materials needed:

None

The software is revised periodically. If the steps in this procedure do not match your MS ChemStation software, refer to the manuals and online help supplied with the software for more information.

1 Make sure your MSD meets all of the conditions list-ed on page 36.

2 Select the Diagnostics/Vacuum Control program. Refer to your software documentation.

3 Select Vacuum from the Diagnostics/Vacuum Control menu.

chapter2 Page 40 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 1:25 PM

Page 41: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

2 Operating the MSD

To pump down the MSD

41

4 Select Pump Down from the Vacuum menu.

The software will prompt you to switch on the MSD. Next it will prompt you to turn on the GC interface heater and GC oven. Once you have done this, the software monitors the interface temperature. It provides an estimate of the time remaining until the MSD is ready.

Even when the software tells you the MSD is ready, you should wait at least 4 hours for the MSD to reach thermal equilibrium before you tune or acquire data. Allowing the MSD to sta-bilize overnight is best.

CAUTION Data acquired before the MSD has reached thermal equilibrium might not be reproducible and should not be used for quantitation.

Data acquired before the MSD has reached thermal equilibrium may be used to determine whether the system is free from leaks and is functioning properly.

chapter2 Page 41 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 1:25 PM

Page 42: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

42

2 Operating the MSD

To monitor the foreline pressure

To monitor the foreline pressure

Materials needed:

None

The software is revised periodically. If the steps in this procedure do not match your MS ChemStation software, refer to the manuals and online help supplied with the software for more information.

1 Select the Manual Tune program. Refer to your soft-ware documentation.

2 Select Status from the Manual Tune window. 3 Select Vacuum/Temp Status from the Status menu.

chapter2 Page 42 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 1:25 PM

Page 43: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

2 Operating the MSD

To monitor the foreline pressure

43

Unless you have just begun the pumpdown process, the foreline pressure must be less than 0.4 Torr (400 mTorr). Normally, the fore-line pressure will be less than 0.1 Torr(100 mTorr).

The Vacuum/Temp Status box will display MS temperature and diffusion pump status as well as foreline pressure.

Foreline pressure can also be monitored from other programs in the software.

chapter2 Page 43 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 1:25 PM

Page 44: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

44

2 Operating the MSD

To connect the gauge controller

To connect the gauge controller

Materials needed:

Cable (8120-6573)Gauge controller (59864-89007)Power cordScrewdriver, TORX T-15 (8710-1622)Wrench, open-end, 1/4-inch × 5/16-inch (8710-0510) WARNING Never connect or disconnect the

cable from the triode gauge tube while the MSD is under vacuum.

1 Vent and switch off the MSD (page 58).

2 Remove the upper and lower MSD covers. Remember to disconnect the status display cable.

3 Connect the cable to the triode gauge tube. Route the cable as shown.

chapter2 Page 44 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 1:25 PM

Page 45: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

2 Operating the MSD

To connect the gauge controller

45

4 Connect the other end of the cable to the gauge controller.

5 Connect the power cord to the gauge controller and then to an appropriate electrical outlet.

The gauge controller has a universal power supply. It can operate on all voltages between 100 and 240 volts ac (nominal). It can operate at ac frequencies of 50 to 60 hertz. The fuse in the gauge controller is appropriate for all volt-ages in the allowed range.

A 2-meter power cord is supplied with a con-nector appropriate for the country from which the order was placed.

6 Reinstall the MSD covers and reconnect the status display cable. Pump down the MSD (page 40).

chapter2 Page 45 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 1:25 PM

Page 46: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

46

2 Operating the MSD

To monitor vacuum manifold pressure

To monitor vacuum manifold pressure

Materials needed:

Cable (8120-6573)Gauge controller (59864-89007)

WARNING Never connect or disconnect the cable from the triode gauge tube while the MSD is under vacuum.

1 Connect the gauge controller to the triode gauge tube (page 44) and pump down the MSD (page 40).

2 Switch on the power switch on the back of the gauge controller.

3 Press and release the GAUGE button. After a few seconds, the pressure should be displayed.

chapter2 Page 46 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 1:25 PM

Page 47: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

2 Operating the MSD

To monitor vacuum manifold pressure

47

Pressure is displayed in the format X.X – X where – X is the base 10 exponent. Units are Torr.

The gauge controller will not turn on if the pressure in the MSD is above approxi-mately 8 × 10-3 Torr. The gauge controller will display all 9s and then go blank. The triode gauge tube and gauge controller can measure pressures between approximately 8 × 10-3 and 8 × 10-6 Torr. The gauge controller is calibrated for nitrogen, but all pressures listed in this manual are for helium carrier gas.

The largest influence on operating pressure is the carrier gas (column) flow. Higher carrier gas flows result in higher pressures. The following table lists typi-cal pressures for various helium carrier gas flows. These pressures are approxi-mate and will vary from instrument to instrument.

If the pressure is consistently higher than those listed, there may be a leak in the detector. See Finding air leaks on page 124.

If the pressure rises above approximately 8 × 10-3 Torr, the gauge controller will turn off the triode gauge tube. The gauge tube does not turn on automatically if the pressure falls below that level again.

Table 2 Typical MSD vacuum manifold pressures for various carrier gas flow rates

Carrier gas flow (ml/min)

Typical pressure (in Torr)

Carrier gas flow (ml/min)

Typical pressure (in Torr)

0.2 1.6 × 10-5 0.9 7.0 × 10-5 0.3 2.4 × 10-5 1.0 7.7 × 10-5 0.4 3.2 × 10-5 1.2 9.1 × 10-5 0.5 4.0 × 10-5 1.4 1.0 × 10-4 0.6 4.7 × 10-5 1.6 1.2 × 10-4 0.7 5.4 × 10-5 1.8 1.3 × 10-4 0.8 6.2 × 10-5 2.0 1.4 × 10-4

chapter2 Page 47 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 1:25 PM

Page 48: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

48

2 Operating the MSD

To set the GC interface temperature from an HP 5890 GC

To set the GC interface temperature from an HP 5890 GC

Materials needed:

None

1 Press the Det B Temp key on the numeric keypad of the GC.

If your GC/MSD system is configured so that the GC interface heater is powered by the auxiliary (Aux) heated zone, press the shift (gold) key before you press the Det B Temp key.

2 Use the number keys to type in the new temperature setpoint.

chapter2 Page 48 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 1:25 PM

Page 49: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

2 Operating the MSD

To set the GC interface temperature from an HP 5890 GC

49

A typical setpoint is 280°C. The limits are 0°C and 320°C. In practice, any temperature setpoint below ambient simply turns off the interface heater.

3 Press the Enter key.

chapter2 Page 49 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 1:25 PM

Page 50: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

50

2 Operating the MSD

To set the GC interface temperature from an HP 6890 GC

To set the GC interface temperature from an HP 6890 GC

Materials needed:

None

1 Press the Aux # key.

2 Press 2 (the GC interface is powered by auxiliary heated zone 2 on the HP 6890 Series GC).

3 Use the number keys to type in the new temperature setpoint.

chapter2 Page 50 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 1:25 PM

Page 51: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

2 Operating the MSD

To set the GC interface temperature from an HP 6890 GC

51

A typical setpoint is 280°C. The limits are 0°C and 320°C. In practice, any temperature setpoint below ambient simply turns off the interface heater.

4 Press the Enter key.

chapter2 Page 51 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 1:25 PM

Page 52: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

52

2 Operating the MSD

To set the GC interface temperature from the ChemStation

To set the GC interface temperature from the ChemStation

Materials needed:

None

The software is revised periodically. If the steps in this procedure do not match your MS ChemStation software, refer to the manuals and online help supplied with the software for more information.

1 Select the temperature control program from the software. Refer to your software documentation.

For HP 5890 GC / HP 5972A MSD systems, the GC interface heater is controlled by either the detector B (Det B) heated zone or the auxiliary (Aux) heated zone.

For HP 6890 Series GC/MSD systems, the GC interface heater is controlled by the auxiliary 2 (Aux 2) heated zone.

A typical setpoint is 280 °C. The limits are 0°C and 320°C. In practice, any temperature setpoint below ambient simply turns off the interface heater.

2 Type the new temperature setpoint in the appropriate heated zone.

chapter2 Page 52 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 1:25 PM

Page 53: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

2 Operating the MSD

To set the GC interface temperature from the ChemStation

53

3 Click OK or Apply to download the setpoint to the GC.

chapter2 Page 53 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 1:25 PM

Page 54: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

54

2 Operating the MSD

To measure column flow

To measure column flow

Materials needed:

Syringe

1 Use either Tune or Data Acquisition to set up select-ed ion monitoring (SIM) of m/z 28.

2 Inject about 4 µl of air into the injection port and click Start Run.

3 Wait until a peak elutes at m/z 28. Measure the retention time.

chapter2 Page 54 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 1:25 PM

Page 55: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

2 Operating the MSD

To measure column flow

55

Average linear velocity (cm/sec) =

where:

L = length of the column in meterst = retention time in seconds

Average volumetric flow rate (ml/min) =

where:

v = average linear velocityD = column internal diameter in millimeters

4 Calculate the average linear velocity. 5 Calculate the volumetric flow rate.

When calculating the average linear velocity, be sure to account for any pieces of column bro-ken off. A 1-meter section missing from a 25-meter column can yield a 4% error.

CAUTION The column flow rate into the MSD should not exceed 2.0 ml/minute during tuning or data acquisition. Optimum sensitivity generally occurs at 1.0 ml/minute or less.

The equations in steps 4 and 5 can be replaced by a single equation:

Volumetric flow rate (ml/min) =

where:

D = internal column diameter in millimetersL = the column length in meterst = the retention time in minutes

However, the average linear velocity found in step 4 is sometimes helpful in optimizing chro-matography.

100 L

t---------------

v D2

2.12-----------

0.785 D2 L

t-----------------------------

chapter2 Page 55 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 1:25 PM

Page 56: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

56

2 Operating the MSD

To tune the MSD

To tune the MSD

Materials needed:

None

The software is revised periodically. If the steps in this procedure do not match your MS ChemStation software, refer to the manuals and online help supplied with the software for more information.

1 Locate the tune programs in the MS ChemStation software. Refer to your software documentation.

If you select Max Sensitivity Autotune, Standard Spectra Autotune, or Quick Tune, the tune program will start immediately.

If you select Manual Tune, Target Tune, User Tune or CI Tune, you will be presented with additional menu choices.

See the manuals or online help provided with your data system for additional information about the various tune programs.

2 Select the tune program you want to use.

chapter2 Page 56 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 1:25 PM

Page 57: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

2 Operating the MSD

To tune the MSD

57

Save tune reports. They can be very helpful in diagnosing performance problems and deter-mining when to clean the ion source.

3 Wait for the tune program to finish. It will automatically generate a tune report.

chapter2 Page 57 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 1:25 PM

Page 58: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

58

2 Operating the MSD

To vent the MSD

To vent the MSD

Materials needed:

Wrench, open-end, 1/4-inch × 5/16-inch (8710-0510)

The software is revised periodically. If the steps in this procedure do not match your MS ChemStation software, refer to the manuals and online help supplied with the software for more information.

If the data system is not working correctly, the MSD can still be vented. See page 39.

1 If your system is equipped with a gauge controller, switch off the triode gauge and gauge controller.

2 Select the Diagnostic/Vacuum Control program. Refer to your software documentation.

3 Select Vacuum from the Diagnostic/Vacuum Control menu.

chapter2 Page 58 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 1:25 PM

Page 59: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

2 Operating the MSD

To vent the MSD

59

The vent program instructs you to turn off the GC interface heater and GC oven. The pro-gram turns off the diffusion pump heater. The program displays an estimate of the time it will take the diffusion pump and analyzer to cool. When the time reaches 0, or when the program prompts you, switch off the MSD power switch.

If absolutely necessary, you can switch off the MSD and vent as soon as the diffusion pump is cool and the MS temperature is below 100 °C.

4 Select Vent Cycle from the Vacuum menu. Follow the instructions presented.

5 Disconnect the MSD power cord. 6 Loosen the column nut and remove the transfer line (capillary column) from the GC interface.

chapter2 Page 59 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 1:29 PM

Page 60: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

60

2 Operating the MSD

To move or store the MSD

To move or store the MSD

Materials needed:

Ferrule, blank (0100-0691)Wrench, open-end, 1/4-inch × 5/16-inch (8710-0510)

1 Vent the MSD (page 58) and switch off the GC.

2 Install a blank ferrule and column nut on the end of the GC interface.

3 Slide the MSD away from the GC. Unplug the GC interface cable from the GC.

chapter2 Page 60 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 1:25 PM

Page 61: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

2 Operating the MSD

To move or store the MSD

61

The MSD is now ready to be moved. If you are going to store the MSD or if more than 24 hours will elapse before you operate it again, follow step 5.

CAUTION Extreme tipping or inverting of the MSD will result in contamination of the vacuum manifold and analyzer by diffusion pump fluid.

4 Remove the upper MSD cover and install the shipping clamps. Reinstall the upper MSD cover.

The MSD can now be stored or moved. If the MSD is moved, the foreline pump must be moved with the MSD. They cannot be discon-nected. Make sure the MSD is never tipped on its side or inverted.

5 Switch the MSD on for 1 minute to re-establish a rough vacuum. Switch the MSD off.

1 min...

chapter2 Page 61 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 1:25 PM

Page 62: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

62

chapter2 Page 62 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 1:25 PM

Page 63: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3

Troubleshooting the MSD

How to find and correct problems in your MSD

Symptoms, 65Finding air leaks, 124Checking for contamination, 136Testing, 141

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 63 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 64: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

64

Troubleshooting the MSD

This chapter will help you diagnose problems in the operation of your HP 5972A or HP 6890 Series Mass Selective Detector (MSD). It is divided into four sections:

• Symptoms, 65

• Finding air leaks, 124

• Checking for contamination, 136

• Testing, 141

If the material in this chapter proves insufficient to help you diagnose a problem, contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 64 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 65: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

65

Symptoms

This section lists common symptoms of problems in an MSD. Related symptoms are grouped together in the following categories:

• General symptoms

• Performance symptoms

• Pressure symptoms

• Temperature symptoms

• Error messages

These categories are briefly described in the following material. The symptoms are then listed in the above order with no introductions between the categories.

General symptoms occur when you turn on the MSD

This section describes symptoms that you may observe during start up and pump down of the MSD. Some of the symptoms may also occur at other times.

• If the MSD does not turn on, 70

• If the MSD is on but the fan is not operating, 71

• If the MSD is on but the foreline pump is not operating, 72

• If the MSD is on but the status LEDs are all blinking, 73

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 65 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 66: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

66

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

Performance symptoms appear in analytical results

Performance symptoms are symptoms that can be observed in the chromatograms and mass spectra generated by tuning or by data acquisition. Some symptoms only occur during tuning. Others occur in data acquisition or in both tuning and data acquisition.

The following table lists common performance symptoms and groups them according to where they occur most often.

Table 3 Performance symptoms and where they commonly occur

Symptom, page number Tune Acquisition

If the relative abundance of m/z 502 is lower than expected, 74 ✓

If peak widths are inconsistent (narrow or wide peak at m/z 219), 76 ✓

If peak widths are < 0.45 amu or > 0.65 amu, 78 ✓

If mass spectra show excessive, periodic noise, 79 ✓ ✓

If isotopes are missing or isotope ratios are incorrect, 80 ✓ ✓

If mass spectra show high background, 82 ✓ ✓

If there are peaks at m/z 18, 28, and 32, 83 ✓ ✓

If no peaks are present, 84 ✓ ✓

If sensitivity is low, 88 ✓

If repeatability is poor, 90 ✓

If high-mass sensitivity is poor, 92 ✓

If mass assignments are incorrect, 94 ✓

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 66 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 67: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

67

Pressure symptoms

Abnormal vacuum pressure sometimes indicates a problem in the MSD. In the standard MSD, the foreline gauge monitors pressure at the exit of the diffusion pump. Foreline pressure above 300 mTorr will generate an error message.

If your MSD is equipped with the optional gauge controller, you can directly monitor the pressure in the vacuum manifold. The following symptoms are described in this section:

• If the foreline or vacuum manifold pressure is too low, 95

• If the foreline or vacuum manifold pressure is too high, 96

• If the gauge controller displays 9.9+9 and then goes blank, 98

• If the power indicator on the gauge controller does not light, 100

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 67 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 68: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

68

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

Temperature symptoms can be observed through the data system

Two temperature zones in the MSD can be monitored by the operator. The GC interface temperature is controlled by the GC. It can be monitored, and its setpoint can be changed, from either the GC keypad or from the data system. The analyzer temperature in the MSD is monitored by the data system where it is called the MS temperature. You can check this temperature through the data system.

In addition, there are two thermal switches on the diffusion pump. They cause the pump to be switched off if it gets too hot or too cold. The diffusion pump temperature can not be monitored by the operator.

Some temperature problems will cause an error message to be generated. Others can be observed by the operator through the data system. The following symptoms are described in this section:

• If the analyzer temperature is too low, 102

• If the GC interface does not heat up, 104

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 68 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 69: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

69

Error messages appear on your data system

Sometimes, a problem in your MSD will cause an error message to appear on the data system monitor. Some error messages appear only during tuning. Other messages will appear during tuning or data acquisition.

Some error messages are “latched”. These messages remain active in your data system even if the condition that caused the message has corrected itself. If the cause is removed, these messages can be removed by checking instrument status through the data system.

The following error messages are described in this section:

• Cannot achieve constant peak widths, 106

• Difficulty in the mass filter electronics (MS error 4), 108

• Difficulty with the detector HV supply (MS error 512), 109

• The diffusion pump is or was too hot (MS error 32), 110

• The diffusion pump is too cold (MS error 128), 112

• The foreline pressure has exceeded 300 mTorr (MS error 64), 116

• Mass spectrometer interface card is not active, 118

• MS does not respond, 119

• No peaks found, 120

• There is no emission current (MS error 8), 121

• There is not enough signal to begin the tune, 122

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 69 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 70: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

70

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If the MSD does not turn on

If the MSD does not turn on

This refers to a condition in which nothing happens when the MSD is switched on. The foreline pump does not start up, the fan does not start up, and none of the status display LEDs on the front of the MSD light.

Check the MSD power switch

The power switch (circuit breaker) should be in the ON (1) position. If you switch the power switch on and it returns to a neutral position (not off or on), this indicates a serious problem. Contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer.

Check the MSD power cord

The power cord should be securely plugged into an appropriate electrical outlet.

Check the line voltage at the electrical outlet

Make sure power is present and that it is the correct voltage for your MSD.

W A R N I N G Only a trained electrician should check the line voltage.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 70 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 71: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If the MSD is on but the fan is not operating

71

If the MSD is on but the fan is not operating

This refers to a condition where the MSD is receiving power (at least the foreline pump is operating) but the diffusion pump fan is not blowing air out the rear of the instrument. If this occurs, first switch off the MSD. Wait about one minute and switch the MSD back on. If the fan is still not operating, check the following:

Check the connection between the fan wiring connector and the power

distribution board

1 Shut down and vent the MSD.

2 Remove the diffusion pump and fan.

3 Make sure the fan wiring connector is securely connected to the power distribution board.

Check the fan

1 Shut down and vent the MSD.

2 Remove diffusion pump and fan.

3 Make sure the fan blades rotate freely. Occasionally the fan wires interfere with the rotation of the fan.

4 Make sure the fan rotates smoothly and quietly. Bad bearings will make noise or feel rough as the fan turns.

5 Use an ohmmeter to check the resistance of the fan motor. Resistance should be about 300 ohms in a 110/120 V ac fan or about 900 ohms in a 220/240 V ac fan. Hold the fan still while you take this measurement; otherwise the resistance varies as the fan turns.

6 If the fan is bad, replace it.

Contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 71 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 72: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

72

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If the MSD is on but the foreline pump is not operating

If the MSD is on but the foreline pump is not operating

This refers to a condition when you can tell the MSD is receiving power (the fan is operating and the power LED on the status display is lit) but the foreline pump is not operating.

Check the on/off switch on the foreline pump

Make sure the switch is on. This switch should not normally be used to switch the foreline pump on and off. The foreline pump should be controlled by the power switch on the MSD.

Check the power cord of the foreline pump

Make sure the cord is securely plugged into the socket on the back of the MSD. If the pump is plugged in but is not operating, replace the foreline pump or contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 72 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 73: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If the MSD is on but the status LEDs are all blinking

73

If the MSD is on but the status LEDs are all blinking

This is normal when the MSD is initially turned on. The status lights will blink until the data system software is started or the pumpdown cycle is initiated. The data system then downloads the instrument control software to the HP-IB/MS control card. When this occurs, the status LEDs will all light for a few seconds and then begin to operate normally, leaving the power LED on and the others off. If the status LEDs do not stop blinking, check the following:

Check the cable between the MSD and the data system

1 Make sure the appropriate cable is connected between the MSD and the data system.

2 Make sure the cable is securely connected at both ends.

3 If necessary, clean the connector contacts or tighten the connector screws.

4 If that does not correct the problem, replace the cable.

Check the cable between the HP-IB/MS control card and the HP-IB

connector on the back panel of the MSD

1 Shut down the MSD (follow the vent procedure and switch off the MSD but do not remove the capillary column from the GC interface).

2 Remove the upper and lower MSD covers.

3 Remove the safety cover from over the HP-IB/MS control card.

4 Make sure the cable between the HP-IB/MS control card and the HP-IB connector (I/O connector) is securely connected at both ends.

Check the output of the +5 V dc power supply

See Also To test the power supply, page 148

Contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 73 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 74: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

74

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If the relative abundance (percentage) of m/z 502 is lower than expected

If the relative abundance (percentage) of m/z 502 is lower than expected

This refers to a condition where the abundance of m/z 502 is lower than expected relative to the abundance of m/z 69. The standard spectra autotune should give an m/z 502 relative abundance of 2 – 4%. The maximum sensitivity autotune should give an m/z 502 relative abundance of 0.2 – 2.0%.

This symptom should not be confused with general low abundance at high masses. Sensitivity at high masses can be excellent even if the relative abundance of m/z 502 is low. In fact, the maximum sensitivity autotune typically produces better high mass sensitivity than the standard spectra autotune even though its relative

abundance of m/z 502 is lower than the relative abundance produced by the standard spectra autotune. If your instrument is producing low abundance at high masses, refer to the symptom If high mass sensitivity is poor on page 92.

Check to see which tune program was used

If the relative abundance you observe is not appropriate for the tune program used, refer to the other check steps in this module.

Check to see how long the MSD has been on

Contaminants that interfere with the relative abundance of m/z 502 may still be present in the instrument. Wait until the MSD has been on at least 8 hours, then try autotune again.

Check the foreline pressure or vacuum manifold pressure

At normal column flow rates, foreline pressure is typically between 20 and 100 mTorr. Vacuum manifold pressure is typically between 1 × 10-6 and 1.4 × 10-4 Torr. If pressure is too low, check the column flow. If pressure is too high, reduce the column flow and/or check for air leaks.

See Also To measure column flow, page 54

Finding air leaks, page 124

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 74 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 75: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If the relative abundance (percentage) of m/z 502 is lower than expected

75

Check the column flow

Column flow should not exceed 2.0 ml/minute during tuning or data acquisition. Reduce the column flow and retune the MSD.

See Also To measure the column flow, page 54

Check for poor filament operation

1 Use the MS ChemStation software to select the other filament.

2 Retune the MSD. If sensitivity improves, continue to use the new filament.

3 Replace the original filament when convenient.

See Also To test the filaments, page 142

To reinstall a filament, page 222

Check for a dirty ion source

Test for a dirty ion source. If necessary, clean the ion source.

See Also To test the ion source, page 156

To clean the ion source, page 212

Check the dc polarity on the quadrupole mass filter

1 Change the dc polarity on the quadrupole mass filter.

2 Retune the MSD.

3 If performance improves, continue to use the new dc polarity.

Contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 75 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 76: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

76

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If peak widths are inconsistent (narrow or wide peak at m/z 219)

If peak widths are inconsistent (narrow or wide peakat m/z 219)

Check the MSD tuning

Retune the MSD. Do not acquire data if the MSD is not operating well enough to pass autotune or allow a satisfactory manual tune.

Check (adjust) the width of the peak at m/z 219

This can be done automatically or manually.

Automatically 1 Call up the Manual Tune program.

2 Select Calibrate from the Manual Tune menu.

3 Select PW Linearity. This will adjust the peaks so that they are nearly equal.

Manually 1 Call up the Manual Tune program.

2 Select Edit MS Params from the AdjParam menu.

3 Perform a profile scan and see whether the m/z 219 peak is wider or narrower than the other peaks.

4 Raise or lower the 219 width parameter.

5 Select Mass #3 widths from the Calibrate (Calibration) menu. This adjusts peaks 1 and 3 until the peaks are 0.55 ± 0.03 amu wide.

6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 until the peak widths are nearly equal.

7 Save the new settings to your autotune file.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 76 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 77: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If peak widths are inconsistent (narrow or wide peak at m/z 219)

77

Check for ground-fault loops

If the MSD and GC are connected to separate power sources, the grounds may be at different potentials. This creates a current path (ground-fault loop) through the GC interface and analyzer. A ground-fault loop can cause noise in your data. If possible, connect the MSD and GC to the same power source. If this is not possible (for example, because the MSD and GC operate on different voltages), make sure the grounds for the power sources are at the same potential.

Contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer

W A R N I N G Checking for a ground-fault loop should be done by a qualified electrician.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 77 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 78: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

78

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If peak widths are < 0.45 amu or > 0.65 amu

If peak widths are < 0.45 amu or > 0.65 amu

Check the peak width targets

1 Select the Set Peak Width Target item in the Tune menu of the Manual Tune window.

2 If necessary, set the peak width targets to 0.55 amu.

Check the MSD tuning

Retune the MSD. Do not acquire data if the MSD is not operating well enough to pass autotune or allow a satisfactory manual tune.

Check the amu gain and amu offset

1 Call up the Manual Tune program.

2 Select Edit MS Params from the AdjParam menu.

3 Perform a profile scan.

4 Raise or lower the AmuGain parameter to raise or lower the peak widths of the peaks at m/z 69 and 502.

5 Raise or lower the AmuOffs parameter to equalize all three peak widths.

6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 until the peak widths are nearly equal.

7 Save the new settings to your autotune file.

The PW Linearity and Mass #3 width options in the Calibrate (calibration) menu can be used to accomplish the same as the above.

Check the repeller voltage

A high repeller voltage can cause or contribute to this problem. This only applies to modes of operation that allow variable repeller voltage such as maximum sensitivity autotune. Lower the repeller voltage. If results improve, continue to adjust the repeller voltage until you find the optimum voltage.

Contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 78 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 79: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If mass spectra show excessive, periodic noise

79

If mass spectra show excessive, periodic noise

This refers to electronic noise that appears as a jagged baseline throughout the mass spectra. Specifically, noise that is periodic and nearly equal at all masses.

Check for ground-fault loops

If the MSD and GC are connected to separate power sources, the grounds may be at different potentials. This creates a current path (ground-fault loop) through the GC interface and analyzer. A ground-fault loop can cause noise in your data. If possible, connect the MSD and GC to the same power source. If this is not possible (for example, because the MSD and GC operate on different voltages), make sure the grounds for the power sources are at the same potential.

Check for a loose signal cable

1 Shut down the MSD (follow the vent procedure and switch off the MSD but do not remove the capillary column from the GC interface).

2 Remove the upper and lower MSD covers.

3 Remove the safety cover from over the main board.

4 Check the connections at both ends of the signal cable. Tighten the connections if necessary.

Check the electron multiplier for loose electrical connections

1 Shut down and vent the MSD.

2 Remove the analyzer.

3 Check the electrical connections to the electron multiplier. Tighten the connections if necessary.

Check to see if the electron multiplier is loose

1 Shut down and vent the MSD.

2 Remove the analyzer.

3 Make sure the electron multiplier is securely fastened to the ceramic quadrupole support at the end of the radiator.

W A R N I N G Checking for a ground-fault loop should be done by a qualified electrician.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 79 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 80: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

80

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If isotopes are missing or isotope ratios are incorrect

If isotopes are missing or isotope ratios are incorrect

Check the MSD tuning

Retune the MSD. Do not acquire data if the MSD is not operating well enough to pass autotune or allow a satisfactory manual tune.

Check for incorrect resolution of adjacent peaks

Peaks that are too wide sometimes give higher-than-normal isotope ratios or cause missing isotopes. Peaks that are too narrow sometimes give lower-than-normal isotope ratios. If necessary, retune your MSD. Narrow or widen the peak width targets as necessary.

Check for a dirty ion source

Test for a dirty ion source. If necessary, clean the ion source.

See Also To test the ion source, page 156

To clean the ion source, page 212

Check for high background

The ion at m/z 70 is very sensitive to high background. High background is most common after the MSD has been open to the atmosphere. This is especially true if parts such as the ion source were cleaned. Give the instrument plenty of time to pump down with the GC interface heater on.

See Also If mass spectra show high background, page 82

Check the electron multiplier voltage

High electron multiplier voltages can cause or contribute to this problem. Lower the electron multiplier voltage about 200 V. If the results improve, continue to adjust the electron multiplier voltage until you find the optimum voltage.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 80 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 81: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If isotopes are missing or isotope ratios are incorrect

81

Check the repeller voltage

A high repeller voltage can cause or contribute to this problem. This only applies to modes of operation that allow variable repeller voltage such as maximum sensitivity autotune. Lower the repeller voltage. If results improve, continue to adjust the repeller voltage until you find the optimum voltage.

Check the scan speed

High (fast) scan speeds can cause or contribute to this problem. Lower the scan speed by increasing the samples (scan mode) or by increasing the dwell time (SIM mode).

Contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 81 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 82: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

82

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If mass spectra show high background

If mass spectra show high background

Background is the mass spectrum of all the residual substances present in the MSD in the absence of a sample. When a sample is injected, the mass spectrum becomes the spectrum of the background plus the spectrum of the sample. A new MSD, or one that has recently been vented, typically has many background peaks. This type of background tends to decrease with time. It eventually reaches acceptable equilibrium values. The possible causes listed below refer to high background that is still present after more than one day under vacuum.

Check the foreline pressure or vacuum manifold pressure

Excessive pressure can result in higher-than-normal background. At normal column flow rates, foreline pressure is typically between 20 and 100 mTorr. Vacuum manifold pressure is typically between 1 × 10-6 and 1.4 × 10-4 Torr. If pressure is too high, reduce the column flow and/or check for air leaks.

See Also To measure column flow, page 54

Check for air leaks

See if the background peaks correspond to peaks associated with air leaks. If they do, check for air leaks.

See Also Finding air leaks, page 124

Check for other contamination

See if the background peaks correspond to peaks associated with contamination other than air. If they do, clean the ion source or take other action as appropriate for the type of contamination detected.

See Also Checking for contamination, page 136

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 82 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 83: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If there are peaks at m/z 18, 28, and 32

83

If there are peaks at m/z 18, 28, and 32

These, along with a peak at m/z 44, are the classic peaks seen when an MSD has an air leak. Small peaks at these masses are normal. If these peaks get larger, or if they are interfering with your analyses, check the following:

Check for an air leak

See Also Finding air leaks, page 124

Contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 83 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 84: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

84

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If no peaks are present

If no peaks are present

This refers to a situation in which you run an autotune or analyze a sample and no peaks are present, only noise. The first step in finding the cause of this symptom is to determine whether the cause is in the electron multiplier (or related electronics) or whether the cause is unrelated to the electron multiplier.

1 Use the appropriate tune program to initiate a repeat profile scan.

2 Increase the electron multiplier voltage.

If the abundance of the noise increases, the problem is probably not related to the electron multiplier or its electronics. If the abundance of the noise does not increase, the problem is probably in the electron multiplier or related electronics. Consult the following material for further help in locating the cause of this symptom.

If the noise increases

Check the chromatography

If you are analyzing an actual sample, make sure the chromatography is correct. Make sure the sample concentration is correct.

Check the foreline pressure or vacuum manifold pressure

Excessive pressure can reduce or even eliminate the signal level. At normal column flow rates (0.1 to 2.0 ml/minute), foreline pressure should be between 20 and 100 mTorr. Vacuum manifold pressure should be between 1 × 10-6 and 1.4 × 10-4 Torr. If pressure is too high, reduce the column flow and/or check for air leaks.

See Also To measure column flow, page 54

Finding air leaks, page 124

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 84 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 85: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If no peaks are present

85

Check the PFTBA level in the calibration vial

1 Remove the upper and lower MSD covers.

2 Check the PFTBA level calibration vial. If necessary, add PFTBA.

See Also To fill and reinstall the calibration vial, page 188

Check the calibration valve

1 Initiate an autotune.

2 Listen for a click when the calibration valve is supposed to operate. If you don't hear the click, either the valve or the electronics controlling it are not working properly.

See Also To test the calibration valve, page 152

Check for poor filament operation

1 Use the data system to select the other filament.

2 Retune the MSD. If peaks appear, continue to use the new filament.

3 Replace the original filament when convenient.

See Also To reinstall a filament, page 222

To test the filaments, page 142

Check the filament cable connections

1 Shut down the MSD (use the vent procedure and switch off the MSD but do not remove the capillary column from the GC interface).

2 Remove the upper MSD cover.

3 Make sure the filament cable is firmly connected at both ends. The filament cable is the twisted pair of thick white wires near the front of the MSD.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 85 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 86: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

86

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If no peaks are present

Check the ion source connections

1 Shut down and vent the MSD.

2 Remove the analyzer.

3 Make sure all leads to the ion source are securely connected. Make sure they are not shorted to a grounded surface.

Contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer

If the noise does not increase

Check the signal cable connections

The signal cable is the slim cable that connects the rear half of the top board to the silver box on the main board. The signal cable has square, metal right-angle connectors on both ends.

1 Shut down the MSD (follow the vent procedure and switch off the MSD but do not remove the capillary column from the GC interface).

2 Remove the upper and lower MSD covers.

3 Remove the safety cover from over the main board.

4 Check both ends of the signal cable. Make sure the connections are secure. A 5/16-inch wrench may be required to tighten the top board end of the cable.

Check the electrical leads to the electron multiplier

1 Shut down and vent the MSD.

2 Remove the analyzer.

3 Look at the electron multiplier connections. Make sure the leads are properly connected. Make sure they are not shorted to the vacuum chamber wall, top plate, or electron multiplier frame.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 86 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 87: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If no peaks are present

87

Replace the electron multiplier horn

See Also To reinstall the electron multiplier horn, page 226

Contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 87 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 88: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

88

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If sensitivity is low

If sensitivity is low

Check for GC problems

Some of the most common causes of low GC/MSD sensitivity are related to the GC. Make sure the GC column is installed correctly. Make sure the injection port is configured correctly. See the Hewlett-Packard GC/MS application note Optimizing splitless injections on your GC for high performance MS analysis (5091-4587E) for more information.

Check the GC injection type specified in the data acquisition program

The injection type specified must match the injection type used (split or splitless). If they do not match, change one of them so they match.

Check for air leaks

Look in the mass spectra for peaks associated with air leaks (m/z 18, 28, 32, 44). If you find significant peaks at these masses, check for air leaks.

See Also Finding air leaks, page 124

Check the foreline pressure or vacuum manifold pressure

At normal column flow rates, foreline pressure is typically between 20 and 100 mTorr. Vacuum manifold pressure is typically between 1 × 10-6 and 1.4 × 10-4 Torr. If pressure is too low, check the column flow. If pressure is too high, reduce the column flow and/or check for air leaks.

See Also To measure column flow, page 54

Check the tune file specified in the method

The tune file specified in the method must be a valid file. It must be appropriate for the analytical technique and for the type of sample you are analyzing.

Check the MSD tuning

Retune the MSD using an appropriate tune program. Do not acquire data if the MSD is not operating well enough to pass autotune or allow a satisfactory manual tune.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 88 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 89: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If sensitivity is low

89

Check the electron multiplier voltage

Increase the electron multiplier voltage and see if sensitivity improves. If increasing the voltage does not improve sensitivity, or if the electron multiplier voltage is at its limit, check other possible causes.

Check for a dirty ion source

Test for a dirty ion source. If necessary, clean the ion source.

See Also To test the ion source, page 156

To clean the ion source, page 212

Check for an old electron multiplier

If the electron multiplier voltage set by autotune is consistently at or near the upper limit of 3000 V, it may be necessary to replace the electron multiplier horn.

See Also To reinstall the electron multiplier horn, page 226

Check for poor filament operation

1 Use the data system software to select the other filament.

2 Retune the MSD. If sensitivity improves, continue to use the new filament.

3 Replace the original filament when convenient.

See Also To reinstall a filament, page 222

To test the filaments, page 142

Check the dc polarity on the quadrupole mass filter

Switch the dc polarity on the quadrupole mass filter. Retune the MSD. If performance improves, continue to use the new dc polarity.

Check the GC interface temperature and MS temperature

The GC interface temperature should generally be between 250° and 320°C. The MS temperature should be at least 150°C.

Contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 89 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 90: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

90

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If repeatability is poor

If repeatability is poor

Check the injection needle

A dirty injection needle is a very common cause of poor repeatability.

Check the GC

Problems in the GC, especially in the injection port, can cause poor repeatability. Make sure the injection port was installed correctly. See the Hewlett-Packard GC/MS application note Optimizing splitless injections on your GC for high

performance MS analysis (5091-4587E) for more information.

Check for variations in pressure, flow rate, and temperature

Keep the foreline pump and diffusion pump serviced. Make sure the carrier gas supply is steady and well-regulated. Avoid large changes in the ambient temperature. Keep the MSD out of drafts and direct sunlight.

Check for a dirty ion source

Test for a dirty ion source. If necessary, clean the ion source.

See Also To test the ion source, page 156

To clean the ion source, page 212

Check for loose connections in the analyzer

1 Shut down and vent the MSD.

2 Check the external analyzer wiring connections. Correct any loose connections.

3 If the external connections were secure, remove the analyzer.

4 Check all the internal analyzer wiring connections. Correct any loose connections.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 90 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 91: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If repeatability is poor

91

Check for ground-fault loops

If the MSD and GC are connected to separate power sources, the grounds may be at different potentials. This creates a current path (ground-fault loop) through the GC interface and analyzer. A ground-fault loop can cause noise in your data. If possible, connect the MSD and GC to the same power source. If this is not possible (for example, because the MSD and GC operate on different voltages), make sure the grounds for the power sources are at the same potential.

Check the stability of the line voltage

Make sure the line voltage is stable.

Contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer

W A R N I N G Checking for a ground-fault loop should be done by a qualified electrician.

W A R N I N G Checking the line voltage should be done by a qualified electrician.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 91 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 92: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

92

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If high-mass sensitivity is poor

If high-mass sensitivity is poor

This refers to a condition where the absolute abundance at the upper end of the mass range is poor. Absolute abundance should not be confused with the relative abundance (percentage) of m/z 502 to m/z 69. Sensitivity at high masses can be excellent even if the relative abundance of m/z 502 is low. In fact, the maximum sensitivity autotune typically produces better high-mass sensitivity than the standard spectra autotune even though its relative abundance of m/z 502 is lower than the relative abundance produced by the standard spectra autotune.

If your MSD's relative abundance is incorrect for the tune program used, refer to the symptom If the relative abundance of m/z 502 is lower than expected on page 74. If the relative abundance is correct but absolute abundance at high masses is poor, check the following:

Check to see which tune program was used

The maximum sensitivity autotune or manual tuning generally produce the best high-mass sensitivity.

Check to see how long the MSD has been on

Contaminants that interfere with high-mass sensitivity may still be present in the instrument. Wait until the MSD has been on at least 8 hours, then tune it again.

Check the foreline pressure or vacuum manifold pressure

At normal column flow rates, foreline pressure is typically between 20 and 100 mTorr. Vacuum manifold pressure is typically between 1 × 10-6 and 1.4 × 10-4 Torr. If pressure is too low, check the column flow. If pressure is too high, reduce the column flow and/or check for air leaks.

See Also To measure column flow, page 54

Finding air leaks, page 124

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 92 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 93: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If high-mass sensitivity is poor

93

Check for poor filament operation

1 Use the data system software to select the other filament.

2 Retune the MSD. If sensitivity improves, continue to use the new filament.

3 Replace the original filament when convenient.

See Also To reinstall a filament, page 222

To test the filaments, page 142

Check for a dirty ion source

Test for a dirty ion source. If necessary, clean the ion source.

See Also To test the ion source, page 156

To clean the ion source, page 212

Check the dc polarity on the quadrupole mass filter

1 Change the dc polarity on the quadrupole mass filter.

2 Retune the MSD.

3 If performance improves, continue to use the new dc polarity.

Contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 93 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 94: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

94

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If mass assignments are incorrect

If mass assignments are incorrect

Small (acceptable) shape changes at the top of the mass peaks can cause ± 0.1 amu shifts in mass assignments. Shifts greater than ± 0.2 amu indicate a possible malfunction.

Check the MSD tuning

Retune the MSD. Do not acquire data if the MSD is not operating well enough to pass autotune or allow a satisfactory manual tune.

Contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 94 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 95: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If the foreline or vacuum manifold pressure is too low

95

If the foreline or vacuum manifold pressure is too low

At typical column flow rates (0.1 – 2.0 ml/minute), the foreline pressure will be approximately 20 to 100 mTorr. The vacuum manifold pressure will be approximately 1 × 10-6 to 1.4 × 10-4 Torr. If the pressures you observe are below 20 mTorr or 1 × 10-6 Torr, check the following:

Check the column flow

Make sure the column is not plugged. Make sure the column flow has not been reduced or turned off. Heating a capillary column with insufficient column flow can damage the column.

See Also To measure the column flow, page 54

Check the carrier gas supply

Make sure the carrier gas supply is not empty.

Check the carrier gas tubing

Make sure the carrier gas tubing is not bent, pinched, or blocked.

Contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 95 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 96: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

96

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If the foreline or vacuum manifold pressure is too high

If the foreline or vacuum manifold pressure is too high

At typical column flow rates (0.1 – 2.0 ml/minute), the foreline pressure will be approximately 20 to 100 mTorr. The vacuum manifold pressure will be approximately 1 × 10-6 to 1.4 × 10-4 Torr. If the pressure you observe is significantly above 100 mTorr or 1.4 × 10-4 Torr, or if the pressure you observe for a given column flow has increased over time, check the following:

Check the column flow

Column flow should not exceed 2.0 ml/minute during tuning or data acquisition. It should never exceed 2.5 ml/minute. If necessary, reduce the column flow.

See Also To measure the column flow, page 54

Check for air leaks

See if the background peaks correspond to peaks associated with air leaks. If they do, check for air leaks.

See Also Finding air leaks, page 124

Check the fluid level in the diffusion pump

If its fluid level is low, the diffusion pump will not work effectively. Replace the diffusion pump fluid

See Also To check the diffusion pump fluid, page 180

Check the fluid level in the foreline pump

If the fluid level is low, the foreline pump will not work effectively. Add foreline pump fluid or replace the foreline pump fluid.

See Also To check and add foreline pump fluid, page 168

To fill the foreline pump, page 172

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 96 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 97: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If the foreline or vacuum manifold pressure is too high

97

Replace the pellets in the foreline trap

If the adsorbent pellets (molecular sieve) are saturated, they will not work effectively.

See Also To add foreline trap pellets, page 176

Contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer

C A U T I O N Vent the MSD before opening the foreline trap. Otherwise, diffusion pump oil will backstream into the vacuum manifold. This contaminates the analyzer.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 97 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 98: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

98

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If the gauge controller displays 9.9+9 and then goes blank

If the gauge controller displays 9.9+9 and then goes blank

This can happen when you try to turn on the triode gauge or when the triode gauge is already on. It indicates the pressure in the vacuum manifold is above 8 × 10-3 Torr. The triode gauge will not turn on if the pressure is above that level. It automatically turns off if the pressure rises above 8 × 10-3 Torr.

This may happen routinely if you are doing on-column injections. The solvent peak raises manifold pressure above 8 × 10-3 Torr. If this is a recurring problem, it may be best to leave the triode gauge off.

Check to see how long the MSD has been on

If you have recently turned on the MSD, allow the system more time to pump down. If, after 20 minutes, the triode gauge will not turn on, check other causes.

Check the cable between the triode gauge and the gauge controller

Make sure the cable is securely connected to the gauge controller.

Check the foreline pressure

With normal column flow rates, foreline pressure is typically between 20 and 100 mTorr. If the foreline pressure is significantly above 100 mTorr, reduce the column flow and/or check for air leaks.

See Also To measure column flow, page 54

Finding air leaks, page 124

Check the triode gauge filament

1 Turn off the gauge controller.

2 Shut down and vent the MSD.

3 Remove the upper and lower MSD covers.

4 Inspect the triode gauge tube. If the filament is broken, replace the triode gauge tube.

See Also To reinstall a triode gauge tube, page 200

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 98 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 99: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If the gauge controller displays 9.9+9 and then goes blank

99

Check the level of the fluid in the diffusion pump

If the diffusion pump fluid level is low, it will prevent the diffusion pump from producing normal pressure levels.

See Also To check the diffusion pump fluid, page 180

Check the line voltage at the electrical outlet

Make sure the line voltage is within the acceptable range for the gauge controller.

Replace the cable between the gauge controller and the triode gauge

Contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer

W A R N I N G Only a qualified electrician should check the line voltage.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 99 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 100: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

100

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If the power indicator on the gauge controller does not light

If the power indicator on the gauge controller does not light

If the power indicator (LED) on the gauge controller does not light when the gauge controller power switch is on, check the following:

Check the gauge controller power cord

Make sure the power cord is connected to an electrical outlet.

Check the line voltage at the electrical outlet

Make sure the line voltage is within the acceptable range for the gauge controller.

Check the gauge controller fuse

1 Switch off the gauge controller.

2 Disconnect the power cord from the gauge controller.

3 Remove and inspect the gauge controller fuse. If the fuse has failed, replace it with one of the same rating. Try to determine the cause for the fuse failure.

Contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer

W A R N I N G Only a trained electrician should check the line voltage.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 100 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 101: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If the power indicator on the gauge controller does not light

101

Fuse holder

(Switch off gauge controller and unplug power cord before checking fuse)

Power indicator

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 101 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 102: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

102

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If the analyzer temperature is too low

If the analyzer temperature is too low

The analyzer is conductively heated by the GC interface. The Radiator section (page 278) in Chapter 7 discusses the relationship between GC interface temperature and analyzer (MS) temperature. If the analyzer temperature is outside the range listed for a given GC interface temperature, one of the following may be the cause:

Check how long the GC interface heater has been on

The analyzer requires at least 4 hours to reach thermal equilibrium after the GC interface is turned on. Wait at least 4 hours before tuning or acquiring data. It is better if more time has passed; overnight is ideal.

Check the GC

Make sure the appropriate GC heated zone is on (detector B or auxiliary on the HP 5890 GC, auxiliary 2 on the HP 6890 Series GC). Sometimes a GC fault can cause the heated zone to turn off.

Check the contact between the GC interface and the interface socket on

the analyzer

Dirty or damaged contact surfaces can result in poor heat transfer. Poor alignment of the contact surfaces, or an interface socket that is not fully threaded into the radiator, can also result in poor heat transfer.

1 Shut down and vent the MSD.

2 Move the MSD away from the GC.

3 Loosen the KF clamp and remove the GC interface from the MSD.

4 Inspect the GC interface surface that contacts the interface socket. It should be clean and smooth with no dents or scratches. If the interface is dirty, it should be cleaned. If it is damaged, it should be replaced.

5 Remove the analyzer assembly from the vacuum manifold.

6 Make sure the interface socket is present. It should be firmly threaded into the radiator. The inner surface of the socket should be clean and not dented or scratched.

W A R N I N G The GC interface may be extremely hot. Do not touch it until it has cooled.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 102 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 103: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If the analyzer temperature is too low

103

Check the heater sleeve

The heater sleeve should be tightly clamped to the interface assembly. If the sleeve is loose, it will result in poor heat transfer.

1 Shut down and vent the MSD.

2 Move the MSD away from the GC.

3 Remove the insulation from around the GC interface.

4 Make sure the sleeve is tight; you should not be able to rotate or move it. If the sleeve is not tight, tighten it. Try to apply the same torque to each screw.

W A R N I N G The GC interface may be extremely hot. Do not touch it until it has cooled.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 103 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 104: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

104

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If the GC interface does not heat up

If the GC interface does not heat up

The GC interface heater is controlled by one of the heated zones of the GC. If the GC interface will not heat up, check the following:

Check the GC

Make sure the GC is on. Make sure the detector heated zone that controls the GC interface heater is on and an appropriate setpoint has been entered. On an HP 5890 GC, this is either the detector B heated zone or the auxiliary heated zone. On an HP 6890 Series GC, this is the auxiliary 2 heated zone.

Check to make sure the GC interface is connected to the GC

If the GC interface is not connected, checking the appropriate heated zone through the GC keypad will generate an error message or a temperature reading of 824°C.

Check the GC interface heater

1 Shut down and vent the MSD.

2 Move the MSD away from the GC.

3 Switch off the GC.

4 Disconnect the GC interface cable from the GC.

5 Measure the resistance between the heater pins on the connector. If the resistance is nearly infinite, or if the resistance is nearly 0, then the heater/sensor assembly is malfunctioning and should be replaced.

W A R N I N G If the GC is on, dangerous voltages will be present at the connector.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 104 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 105: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

If the GC interface does not heat up

105

Heater ≅ 150 ohms atroom temperature

Sensor ≅ 112 ohms atroom temperature

Connector forHP 5972A MSD

Sensor (pins 2 & 3) ≅ 110 ohms at room temperature

Heater (pins 1 & 4) ≅ 16 ohms at room temperature

Connector for HP 6890 Series MSD

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 105 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 106: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

106

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

Cannot achieve constant peak widths

Cannot achieve constant peak widths

Check the initial tuning parameter settings

The initial tuning parameters may be too far from the correct settings. Use the Manual Tune program to find initial settings that are closer to being correct. Then, either finish tuning manually or use the values as a starting point for autotune. If necessary, select Reset to Defaults from the File menu in the Manual Tune window.

Check the calibration valve

1 Initiate an autotune.

2 Listen for a click when the valve is supposed to open. If you do not hear the click, either the valve or the electronics controlling it are not working properly.

See Also To test the calibration valve, page 152

Check the PFTBA level in the calibration vial

1 Remove the upper and lower MSD covers.

2 Check the calibration vial. If necessary, add PFTBA.

See Also To fill and reinstall the calibration vial, page 188

Check the signal cable connections

1 Shut down the MSD (use the vent procedure and switch off the MSD but do not remove the capillary column from the GC interface).

2 Remove the upper and lower MSD covers.

3 Remove the safety cover from over the main board.

4 Check the signal cable (the small coaxial cable that connects the top board to the main board). Make sure both ends of the cable are securely connected.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 106 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 107: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

Cannot achieve constant peak widths

107

Check for a dirty ion source

Test for a dirty ion source. If necessary, clean the ion source.

See Also To test the ion source, page 156

To clean the ion source, page 212

Check for an old electron multiplier

If the electron multiplier voltage set by autotune is consistently at or near the upper limit of 3000 V, it may be necessary to replace the electron multiplier horn.

See Also To reinstall the electron multiplier horn, page 226

Contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 107 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 108: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

108

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

Difficulty in the mass filter electronics

Difficulty in the mass filter electronics

This is a latched error message. It will remain until you correct the problem and check the instrument status through the data system.

Check to see if the RF coils are correctly adjusted (dipped)

If the RF coils are already adjusted correctly, contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer. If the RF coils are incorrectly adjusted but can be adjusted, do so and check instrument status to remove the error message. If the message returns, contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer. If the RF coils cannot be adjusted, check the mass filter leads.

See Also To adjust the RF coils, page 240

Check the mass filter (quadrupole) electrical leads

This message can be caused by an open or grounded mass filter lead.

1 Shut down and vent the MSD.

2 Remove the analyzer.

3 Inspect the mass filter electrical leads. Make sure all the leads are connected and they are not touching the top plate or any other grounded surface. Reconnect or reposition the leads as necessary.

4 Adjust the RF coils.

Contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer

C A U T I O N Get instruction from your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer before attempting to adjust the coils. Incorrect adjustment can have a very bad effect on MSD performance.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 108 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 109: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

Difficulty with the detector HV supply

109

Difficulty with the detector HV supply

This message is generated when the voltage supplied to the electron multiplier is less than that specified by the data system.

Check the MSD electronics

1 Set the electron multiplier voltage to 0.

2 Turn the MS electronics on (MSON).

3 Read the MS status. If the fault persists, the problem is probably on the main board.

4 Set the electron multiplier voltage above 1000 V. If the fault returns, the problem is probably in the top board or in the wiring in the vacuum manifold.

5 Contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer.

Check the high-voltage lead to the electron multiplier

1 Shut down and vent the MSD.

2 Remove the analyzer.

3 Look at the electron multiplier connections. Make sure the high voltage lead is connected to the proper pin. Make sure it is not shorted to the vacuum chamber wall, top plate, or electron multiplier frame.

Contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer

High-voltage lead

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 109 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 110: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

110

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

The diffusion pump is or was too hot

The diffusion pump is or was too hot

This is a latched error message. Overheating causes the diffusion pump to turn off. Switch the MSD off for 1 minute. Then, switch the MSD on. This resets the diffusion pump.

Check for air flow behind the MSD

If there is no air flow, or only a very weak air flow, the fan is not operating correctly.

See Also If the MSD is on but the fan is not operating, page 71

Check the environment in which the MSD is operating

Do not operate the MSD in ambient temperatures above 35°C.

Check the air intakes on the MSD for blockages

Make sure the vent slots on the side of the MSD are not covered or blocked.

Check the diffusion pump cable

1 Shut down and vent the MSD.

2 Remove the diffusion pump cover.

3 Make sure the diffusion pump cable is securely connected to the connector on the back panel of the MSD.

W A R N I N G The diffusion pump may still be dangerously hot.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 110 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 111: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

The diffusion pump is or was too hot

111

Check the fluid level in the diffusion pump

If the diffusion pump fluid level is too low the pump may become too hot.

See Also To check the diffusion pump fluid, page 180

Check the cable between the power distribution board and the diffusion

pump connector on the back panel

A problem with this cable is unlikely unless the electronics panel has been removed recently.

1 Shut down and vent the MSD.

2 Remove the diffusion pump.

3 Remove the fan.

4 Make sure the cable from the diffusion pump connector on the back panel is securely connected to the power distribution board.

See Also To remove the diffusion pump, page 178

Check the too hot (upper) thermal switch

See Also To test the diffusion pump, page 154

Contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer

W A R N I N G The diffusion pump may still be dangerously hot.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 111 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 112: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

112

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

The diffusion pump is too cold

The diffusion pump is too cold

This message occurs when the diffusion pump temperature falls below its minimum operating temperature. If the air exiting the diffusion pump is warm, pay particular attention to the possible causes related to the thermal switch. If the air exiting the diffusion pump is cool, refer to the possible causes not related to the thermal switch.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 112 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 113: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

The diffusion pump is too cold

113

Possible causes related to the thermal switch

Check the function of the too cold (lower) thermal switch

1 Remove the diffusion pump cover.

2 Use a screwdriver or short piece of wire to connect the two terminals of the lower thermal switch. If the pump is hot and the message disappears, then the switch is bad and it should be replaced. Contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer.

Check the contact between the too cold (lower) thermal switch and the

diffusion pump

Poor contact prevents good heat transfer.

1 Shut down and vent the MSD.

2 Remove the diffusion pump cover.

3 Make sure the screws that hold the too cold (lower) thermal switch in place are tight. A commercial heat-sink compound should be used between the thermal switch and the diffusion pump.

W A R N I N G The diffusion pump may still be dangerously hot.

W A R N I N G The diffusion pump may still be dangerously hot.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 113 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 114: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

114

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

The diffusion pump is too cold

Possible causes not related to the thermal switch

Check how long the MSD has been on

At a room temperature of 25°C, the diffusion pump normally takes 10 – 15 minutes to reach operating temperature. If the room is cooler, it takes a little longer. Give the diffusion pump enough time to warm up.

Check the diffusion pump cover

If the diffusion pump cover is off, the diffusion pump may cool too efficiently. Do not operate your MSD without a diffusion pump cover.

Check the temperature of the air in your laboratory

If the air temperature is below 15°C, the diffusion pump may cool too efficiently. Increase the temperature in your laboratory.

Check for other error messages

Another fault (too hot, excess foreline pressure, etc.) can cause the diffusion pump to turn off. The pump cools causing the too cold switch to open. If this is the cause, another error message (too hot, excess foreline pressure) should appear with the too cold message. Correct the cause of that message.

Check the diffusion pump cable connection

If the diffusion pump cable is not firmly connected, the pump may not heat up.

1 Remove the diffusion pump cover.

2 Make sure the diffusion pump cable is securely connected to the connector on the back panel of the MSD.

Check for variations in the line voltage

If the ac line power drops below the minimum allowed voltage for more than 4 seconds, the pump switches off. Switch the MSD power switch off and, after a few seconds, back on. This resets the diffusion pump heater circuitry. If the pump shuts off repeatedly, check your ac power source.

W A R N I N G The diffusion pump may still be dangerously hot.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 114 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 115: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

The diffusion pump is too cold

115

Check the diffusion pump fuses

If the diffusion pump fuses fail repeatedly, contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer.

See Also To replace the diffusion pump fuses, page 248

Check the diffusion pump heater

If the diffusion pump heater has failed contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer.

See Also To test the diffusion pump, page 154

Contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 115 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 116: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

116

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

The foreline pressure has exceeded 300 mTorr

The foreline pressure has exceeded 300 mTorr

Check to make sure the foreline pump is on

1 Make sure the foreline pump power cord is securely plugged into the outlet on the MSD.

2 Make sure the power (on/off) switch on the foreline pump is on.

3 If the foreline pump is plugged in and switched on but not operating, refer to the symptom If the MSD is on but the foreline pump is not operating on page 72.

Check the foreline gauge connector

The data system interprets an unplugged foreline gauge connector as a failed foreline pump. Make sure the connector is firmly connected to the foreline gauge.

Check the GC column

Make sure the column is not broken. Replace the column if necessary.

Check the hose between the diffusion pump and the foreline pump

Make sure the hose has not collapsed. If it has collapsed, shut down and vent the MSD. Replace the hose.

Check for a large air leak (foreline pump exhaust flow greater

than 5 ml/minute)

1 If the MSD will still operate, test for air leaks.

2 If the MSD will not operate, or if you were unable to locate a leak, shut down and vent the MSD.

3 Inspect the foreline hose, foreline trap, GC interface nut, KF fittings, and manifold O-ring. Look for broken or split hoses, loose fittings, and loose nuts.

See Also Finding air leaks, page 124

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 116 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 117: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

The foreline pressure has exceeded 300 mTorr

117

Replace the pellets in the foreline trap

See Also To add foreline trap pellets, page 176

Check the foreline pump

The foreline pump may be working but not providing enough vacuum.

1 Shut down and vent the MSD.

2 Disconnect the foreline gauge fitting from the diffusion pump. Do not disconnect the foreline gauge cable.

3 Plug the fitting with a rubber stopper.

4 Switch on the MSD. The foreline gauge will still work.

5 Monitor the foreline pressure. If the vacuum fails to fall below 300 mTorr (0.3 Torr), then the foreline pump is defective. Contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer.

Replace the foreline gauge

See if the message returns.

See Also To reinstall the foreline gauge, page 192

C A U T I O N Vent the MSD before opening the foreline trap. Otherwise, diffusion pump oil will backstream into the vacuum manifold. This contaminates the analyzer.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 117 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 118: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

118

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

Mass spectrometer interface card is not active

Mass spectrometer interface card is not active

Check to make sure the MSD is on

Check the HP-IB cable between the MSD and the data system

Make sure the cable is securely connected at both ends.

Check the HP-IB communications

A momentary malfunction in one of the devices on the HP-IB bus can disrupt HP-IB communications. Switch off all of the HP-IB devices including the data system. Then, one device at a time, switch the devices back on. Switch on the data system first and the ALS (if one is present) last.

See Also To test HP-IB communications, page 144

Check the HP-IB/MS control card

See Also To test the HP-IB/MS control card, page 145

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 118 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 119: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

MS does not respond

119

MS does not respond

Check the output of the +5 V dc power supply

See Also To test the power supply, page 148

Contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 119 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 120: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

120

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

No peaks found

No peaks found

Check the threshold setting

If the threshold setting is too high, no peaks will be found. Reduce the threshold setting to 0.

Check the emission current setting

If the emission current has accidentally been set to 0 there will be no peaks. Set the emission current to 50.

Check the electron multiplier voltage

Gradually raise the electron multiplier voltage and see if peaks appear.

Contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer

See Also If no peaks are present, page 84

There is not enough signal to begin the tune, page 122

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 120 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 121: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

There is no emission current

121

There is no emission current

This message indicates power is being sent to a filament, but no electrons are being emitted from that filament. When the filament is switched on, the fault circuitry allows time for the filament to warm up before testing the emission current. Therefore, this message is not caused by insufficient warm-up time.

Check for poor filament operation

1 Use the data system software to select the other filament.

2 Retune the MSD. If sensitivity improves, continue to use the new filament.

3 Replace the original filament when convenient.

See Also To test the filaments, page 142

To reinstall a filament, page 222

Check the filament cable connections

1 Shut down the MSD (use the venting procedure and switch off the MSD but do not remove the capillary column from the GC interface).

2 Remove the upper MSD cover.

3 Make sure the filament cable is firmly connected at both ends. The filament cable is the twisted pair of thick white wires near the front of the MSD.

Contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 121 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 122: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

122

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

There is not enough signal to begin the tune

There is not enough signal to begin the tune

Check the amu (mass) calibration

Poor amu (mass) calibration can cause the actual mass peak to fall outside the window assigned to that mass. Use the Manual Tune program to widen the window. See your software documentation for more information.

Check the foreline pressure or vacuum manifold pressure

Excessive pressure can significantly reduce signal levels. At normal flow rates (0.1 to 2.0 ml/minute), foreline pressure should be between 20 and 100 mTorr. Vacuum manifold pressure should be between 1 × 10-6 and 1.4 × 10-4 Torr. If pressure is too high, reduce the column flow and/or check for air leaks.

See Also To measure column flow, page 54

Finding air leaks, page 124

Check for air leaks

See Also Finding air leaks, page 124

Check the electron multiplier voltage

Increase the electron multiplier voltage to 3000 V by 100-V increments. If the message persists, and you have ruled out the other possible causes, it may be necessary to replace the electron multiplier horn.

Check the calibration valve

1 Initiate an autotune.

2 Listen for a click when the valve is supposed to open. If you don't hear the click, either the valve or the electronics controlling it are not working properly.

See Also To test the calibration valve, page 152

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 122 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 123: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

There is not enough signal to begin the tune

123

Check the PFTBA level in the calibration vial

1 Remove the upper and lower MSD covers.

2 Check the PFTBA level in the calibration vial. If necessary, add PFTBA.

See Also To fill and reinstall the calibration vial, page 188

Check the signal cable connections

1 Shut down the MSD (follow the vent procedure and switch off the MSD but do not remove the capillary column from the GC interface).

2 Remove the upper and lower MSD covers.

3 Remove the safety cover over the main board.

4 Check the signal cable (the small coaxial cable that connects the top board to the main board). Make sure both ends of the cable are securely connected.

Check the electrical leads to the electron multiplier

1 Shut down and vent the MSD.

2 Remove the analyzer.

3 Check the electron multiplier leads. Make sure the leads are properly connected. Make sure they are not shorted to the vacuum chamber wall, top plate, or electron multiplier frame.

Check the electrical leads to the ion source

1 Shut down and vent the MSD.

2 Remove the analyzer.

3 Make sure all leads to the ion source are properly connected.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 123 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 124: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

124

Finding air leaks

Air leaks are a problem for any instrument that requires a vacuum to operate. Leaks are generally caused by vacuum seals that are damaged or not fastened properly. Symptoms of leaks include:

• Higher than normal vacuum manifold or foreline pressure

• Higher than normal background

• Peaks characteristic of air (m/z 18, 28, 32, and 44)

• Poor sensitivity

• Low relative abundance of m/z 502 (this varies with the tune program used)

Perform the following steps to confirm the presence of an air leak and to isolate its source:

Step 1. To confirm the presence of a leak, page 125Step 2. To isolate the source of a leak, page 126Step 3. To find an air leak in the GC, page 127Step 4. To find an air leak in the MSD, page 128

Use the following procedures to correct an air leak:

To correct a column nut leak, page 130To correct a manifold O-ring leak, page 131To correct a leak in a KF fitting, page 132To correct a leak in the triode gauge tube fitting, page 133To correct a calibration valve leak, page 134

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 124 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 125: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

Step 1. To confirm the presence of a leak

125

Step 1. To confirm the presence of a leak

Do not use the air and water check described below if you have recently vented the MSD. It can take up to 4 hours for the abundance of m/z 28 (nitrogen) to fall to an appropriate level. It can take up to 24 hours for the abundance of m/z 18 (water) to fall to an appropriate level.

1 Initiate the air and water check program from your data system.

See the manuals and online help supplied with the MS ChemStation software for more information.

2 Compare the abundances of m/z 28 (nitrogen) and m/z 18 (water).

The abundance of m/z 28 should be less than the abundance of m/z 18.

3 Compare the abundances of m/z 18 (water) and m/z 69 (PFTBA).

The abundance of m/z 18 should be less than 10% of the abundance of m/z 69.

4 Compare the abundances of m/z 28 (nitrogen) and m/z 69 (PFTBA).

The abundance of m/z 28 should be less than 10% of the abundance of m/z 69.

5 Compare the abundances of m/z 28 (nitrogen) and m/z 32 (oxygen).

If an air leak is present, the ratio of m/z 28 to m/z 32 will be about 5:1. If the abundance of m/z 28 is well over 5 times the abundance of m/z 32, then there may be another chemical present with an ion at m/z 28 such as CO or C2H4. If CO is present, there is typically a large peak at m/z 44 (CO2) also.

If the air and water check confirms an air leak, go to Step 2. To isolate the source

of a leak on page 126.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 125 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 126: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

126

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

Step 2. To isolate the source of a leak

Step 2. To isolate the source of a leak

Leaks can originate in the GC or in the MSD. Troubleshooting is easier if you can isolate where the leak originates. The following procedure provides a way to determine where the leak is located.

1 Run an air and water check. Save the results.

2 Remove the GC column from the injection port.

3 Cap the end of the column with a septum.

4 Wait 15 – 20 minutes.

Steps 2 and 3 allow a small amount of air into the MSD. If you continue before the MSD has a chance to pump away this air, the results of this test will be invalid.

5 Run another air and water check.

6 Compare the results of the first check with the second check.

If the results are essentially the same, the leak is in the MSD or in the column nut on the end of the GC interface. If the results are significantly different, the leak is probably in the injection port of the GC.

7 Remove the septum.

8 Score and break off the first 30 mm of the capillary column.

9 Reinstall the column in the injection port.

Depending on the location of the leak, go to Step 3. To find an air leak in the GC on page 127 or to Step 4. To find an air leak in the MSD on page 128.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 126 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 127: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

Step 3. To find an air leak in the GC

127

Step 3. To find an air leak in the GC

Most air leaks in the GC occur at one of three places, the column nut on the end of the GC interface, the injection port, or the septum. Leaks around the column nut are covered in Step 4 with the MSD leaks.

Leaks in split/splitless injection ports can sometimes be confirmed by switching the injection port purge on and off and checking the abundance of the ions associated with leaks (primarily m/z 28 and m/z 32). If the abundance of these ions with the purge off is much greater (× 100) than the abundance of these ions with the purge on, this is confirmation of a leak in the injection port.

A septum will leak after too many injections. The septum should be replaced at least every 100 injections. Keeping a beaker of septa in an oven at 250°C at all times will eliminate the need to condition a new septum once it is in place.

A Merlin MicrosealTM is highly recommended over conventional septa. The microseal eliminates the need for septa and lasts for tens of thousands of injections without leaking. It is most appropriate for use with the HP 7673 autosampler. It only works with untapered, blunt-tip syringes.

See Also The Hewlett-Packard application note Optimizing splitless injections on your

GC for high performance MS analysis (5091-4587E).

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 127 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 128: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

128

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

Step 4. To find an air leak in the MSD

Step 4. To find an air leak in the MSD

The easiest way to find an air leak in your MSD is to use the MSD itself as a detector while spraying potential leak sites with an inert gas.

Materials needed Argon, lecture (0.6 liter) bottleScrewdriver, TORX T-15 (8710-1622)

1 If your GC is equipped with a split/splitless injection port, turn the

injection port purge on during leak checking.

2 If your MSD is equipped with a gauge controller, turn off the triode gauge

and gauge controller before proceeding.

3 With the MSD still on, remove the upper and lower MSD covers and the

diffusion pump cover.

4 Call up the Manual Tune program in your data system.

5 Close the calibration valve.

6 Set the data system to monitor m/z 40, the main peak for argon.

If you choose to use an inert gas other than argon, set the data system to monitor the main ion of that gas.

7 Select the repeat profile scan.

W A R N I N G Do not remove the safety covers over the main board, HP-IB/MS control card, and top board. Dangerous voltages are present under these covers. The diffusion pump will be dangerously hot. The ion gauge may be dangerously hot.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 128 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 129: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

Step 4. To find an air leak in the MSD

129

8 One point at a time, spray argon at the potential leak sites listed below.

After spraying each point, observe the peak profile on the data system. If, after 2 to 5 seconds, you see an abrupt and significant increase at m/z 40, there is a leak where you just sprayed. If, after 5 to 20 seconds, you see a gradual increase at m/z 40, there is a leak near, but not at, the point you just sprayed.

a. Column nut (in the GC oven on the end of the GC interface)b. GC interface KF25 fittingc. Manifold O-ring (all the way around)d. Triode gauge tube fittinge. Calibration valve (with the valve closed)f. Calibration valve (after using the data system to open the valve)g. Diffusion pump KF50 fitting

9 After you have located and repaired a leak, test that point again to make

sure it is repaired.

If repairing a leak requires shutting down or venting the MSD, you may want to check the remaining points before repairing the first leak.

10 Test the remaining points to make sure there was not more than one leak.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 129 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 130: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

130

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

To correct a column nut leak

To correct a column nut leak

The nut may not have been tightened enough when it was installed. Temperature cycling of the GC oven sometimes loosens a new column nut and ferrule.

1 Tighten the column nut.

2 Check again for a leak.

If the leak is still present, the ferrule may be old and fully compressed.

3 Shut down and vent the MSD.

4 Replace the column nut and ferrule.

5 Retighten the nut after it has gone through a few temperature cycles.

See Also To install a capillary-direct column, page 24

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 130 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 131: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

To correct a manifold O-ring leak

131

To correct a manifold O-ring leak

The manifold O-ring is the seal between the top plate and the vacuum manifold. If you detect a leak in the manifold O-ring:

1 Shut down and vent the MSD.

2 Remove the analyzer.

3 Inspect the bottom of the top plate.

If the surface of the top plate is damaged, it can damage the O-ring. Correct the problem and then replace the manifold O-ring.

4 Inspect the O-ring groove in the vacuum manifold for damage.

If the groove is damaged, it can damage the O-ring. Correct the problem and then replace the manifold O-ring.

5 Inspect the manifold O-ring for dust or damage.

If the manifold O-ring is dirty or damaged, replace it. Wear clean gloves when installing a new O-ring. The seam in the O-ring should remain horizontal. Do not twist or roll the O-ring.

See Also To vent the MSD, page 58

To remove the analyzer, page 204

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 131 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 132: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

132

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

To correct a leak in a KF fitting

To correct a leak in a KF fitting

KF fittings can leak either because the clamp is not tightened enough or because the O-ring assembly or coseal is worn or damaged. If you find a KF fitting that is leaking:

1 Tighten the KF clamp.

2 Retest the fitting.

If tightening the clamp does not correct the leak, proceed.

3 Shut down and vent the MSD.

4 Disassemble the leaking fitting.

5 Replace the O-ring assembly or coseal.

W A R N I N G Both the GC interface and the diffusion pump operate at dangerously high temperatures. Shut down and cool the appropriate part before proceeding.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 132 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 133: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

To correct a leak in the triode gauge fitting

133

To correct a leak in the triode gauge fitting

The triode gauge fitting is a threaded fitting with an O-ring seal. If you find a leak there:

1 Switch off the triode gauge and gauge controller.

2 Remove the upper and lower MSD covers.

3 Gently wiggle the triode gauge tube and tighten the triode gauge fitting.

4 If tightening the fitting does not eliminate the leak, shut down and vent

the MSD.

5 Remove the triode gauge tube and replace the O-ring in the fitting.

See Also To reinstall a triode gauge tube, page 200

W A R N I N G Do not over tighten this fitting, it is possible to break the triode gauge tube.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 133 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 134: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

134

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

To correct a calibration valve leak

To correct a calibration valve leak

The proper procedure for correcting a calibration valve leak depends on whether the leak occurs when the valve is open or closed.

If the leak occurs when the valve is closed

1 Switch off the triode gauge and the gauge controller.

2 Remove the upper and lower MSD covers.

3 Tighten the largest nut above the calibration valve.

Use a second wrench to prevent the nut just above the largest one from turning.

4 Retest the calibration valve for leaks.

If tightening the nut does not correct the leak, proceed.

5 Shut down and vent the MSD.

6 Remove the calibration valve assembly.

7 Replace the calibration valve fitting.

8 Reinstall the calibration valve assembly.

See Also To remove the calibration valve, page 194

To reinstall the calibration valve, page 196

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 134 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 135: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

To correct a calibration valve leak

135

If the leak occursonly when the valveis open

1 Tighten the thumbscrew that holds the vial in place.

2 Retest the calibration valve for leaks.

It is possible, but unlikely, that the calibration valve itself is leaking, allowing the tuning compound into the vacuum manifold. The argon leak test will not detect this type of leak. A leaking valve can be diagnosed by excessive background peaks matching peaks in the tuning compound. If the valve itself is leaking, replace the calibration valve assembly.

See Also To remove the calibration valve, page 194

To reinstall the calibration valve, page 196

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 135 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 136: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

136

Checking for contamination

Contamination is usually identified by excessive background in the mass spectra. It can come from the GC or from the MSD. The first thing to do when contamination becomes evident is to determine which instrument is responsible for the contamination. Use the procedure outlined in Step 2.

To isolate the source of a leak on page 126.

The source of the contamination can sometimes be determined by identifying the contaminants. Some contaminants are much more likely to originate in the GC. Others are more likely to originate in the MSD.

The following table lists some of the more common contaminants, the ions characteristic of those contaminants, and the likely sources of those contaminants.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 136 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 137: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

137

Table 4 Common contaminants

Ions (m/z) Compound Possible source

18, 28, 32, 44 H20, N2, O2, CO2 Air

28, 44 CO, CO2 Fragments from hydrocarbon contaminants

31, 51, 69, 100, 119, 131, 169181, 214, 219, 264, 376, 414426, 464, 502, 576, 614

PFTBA and related ions PFTBA (tuning compound)

31 Methanol Cleaning solvent

43, 58 Acetone Cleaning solvent

77 Benzene or xylene Cleaning solvent

91, 92 Toluene or xylene Cleaning solvent

105, 106 Xylene Cleaning solvent

151, 153 Trichloroethane Cleaning solvent

69 Foreline pump fluid or PFTBA Saturated foreline trap pellets or calibration valve leak

73, 147, 207, 221, 281, 295, 355, 429

Dimethylpolysiloxane Septum or methyl silicone column coating

77, 94, 115, 141, 168, 170,262, 354, 446

Diffusion pump fluid andrelated ions

Diffusion pump fluid

149 Plasticizer (phthalates) Vacuum seals (O-rings) damaged by high temperatures

Peaks spaced 14 amu apart Hydrocarbons Fingerprints, foreline pump fluid, saturated foreline trap pellets

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 137 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 138: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

138

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

To find the source of contamination in a GC

To find the source of contamination in a GC

Contamination originating in the GC typically comes from one of these sources:

• Column or septum bleed

• Dirty injection port

• Injection port liner

• Contaminated syringe

• Poor quality carrier gas

Column or septum bleed

These can frequently be identified by an intense peak at 207 amu (dimethyl- polysiloxane). Non cross-linked capillary columns are a major cause. High-bleed septa are also a common cause. We recommend cross-linked capillary columns for almost all applications. We also recommend low-bleed septa such as the Hewlett-Packard “red” septa (5181-3383).

A simple test to detect column bleed is to increase the GC oven temperature 20° or 30°C. A corresponding increase in background indicates column bleed. Column bleed can be prevented or minimized by conditioning the column.

See Also To condition a capillary column, page 22

Dirty injection ports, liners, syringes, and contaminated carriergas

These are harder to diagnose because the background spectra you see will depend on the contaminants. If the contamination problem is coming from the GC, but it is not septum or column bleed, try:

• Cleaning the injection port

• Replacing the injection port liner

• Cleaning or replacing the syringe

• Switching to a different source of carrier gas and/or replacing the gas traps

• Replacing the carrier gas tubing with new (clean) tubing

See Also The Hewlett-Packard application note Optimizing splitless injections on your

GC for high performance MS analysis (5091-4587E)

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 138 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 139: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

To find the source of contamination in an MSD

139

To find the source of contamination in an MSD

Contamination originating in the MSD typically comes from one of the following sources:

• Air leak

• Cleaning solvents

• Diffusion pump fluid

• Foreline pump fluid

• Fingerprints

The action required to remove contamination depends on the type of contamination and the level of contamination. Minor contamination by water or solvents can usually be removed by allowing the system to pump (with a flow of clean carrier gas) overnight. Serious contamination by pump fluid or fingerprints is much more difficult to remove; it may require extensive cleaning. Contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer.

Air leaks Air leaks can occur in many places as discussed previously. Air leaks can be identified by characteristic peaks at m/z 18, 28, 32, and 44. Also, if an air leak is present, the abundance of m/z 28 (nitrogen) is typically greater than the abundance of m/z 18 (water).

See Also Finding air leaks, page 124

Cleaning solvents It is common to see cleaning solvent peaks in the mass spectra shortly after the ion source is cleaned. To avoid this, dry all cleaned metal parts in the GC oven before reassembling and reinstalling them. Use a temperature above the boiling point of the solvent but below the limit of the column. Make sure carrier gas is flowing through the column.

Avoid contact between solvents and O-rings. Do not bake O-rings or parts that contain Teflon.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 139 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 140: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

140

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

To find the source of contamination in an MSD

Diffusion pump fluid If the diffusion pump is allowed to operate with no column (carrier gas) flow into the vacuum system, vapor from the diffusion pump fluid can drift up into the vacuum manifold. More serious is fluid back streamed into the vacuum manifold by sudden or improper venting of the vacuum system. If a diffusion pump has back streamed, a prominent peak will often be seen at m/z 446 and the spectral baseline will exhibit small peaks at most masses. It may also be possible to see a fluid film on parts in the vacuum manifold.

Foreline pump fluid Foreline pump fluid contamination is characterized by peaks spaced 14 amu apart (hydrocarbons). Contamination with foreline pump fluid is less common than contamination with diffusion pump fluid, but can occur if the foreline pump is allowed to operate for an extended time with the diffusion pump off and no carrier gas flow into the system.

Fingerprints Fingerprints contain hydrocarbons that can appear in mass spectra. Fingerprint contamination is characterized by a series of mass peaks 14 amu apart. The abundances of these peaks decrease as peak mass increases. Fingerprint contamination is usually caused by the failure to wear clean gloves during ion source cleaning or GC inlet maintenance. Use special care to avoid recontaminating parts after you clean them.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 140 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 141: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

141

Testing

This section includes the following test procedures:

• To test the filaments, 142

• To test HP-IB communications, 144

• To test the HP-IB/MS control card, 145

• To test GC and ALS communications, 147

• To test the power supply, 148

• To test the calibration valve, 152

• To test the diffusion pump, 154

• To test the ion source, 156

These test procedures can be used to identify the causes of some performance problems in your MSD.

W A R N I N G Some of these procedures involve exposure to potentially hazardous voltages. They are clearly labeled. Do not perform these procedures unless you have been trained to service electronic equipment and work with hazardous voltages.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 141 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 142: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

142

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

To test the filaments

To test the filaments

The following material describes how to test the filaments and related circuits.

This procedure requires a high-impedance voltmeter that draws less than 50 microamps at 70 V dc. The voltmeter must also be capable of reading 30 kHz ac.

Materials needed ScrewdriverTORX T-10 (8710-1623)TORX T-15 (8710-1622)

Voltmeter, HP E2378A or equivalent

1 With the MSD on, remove the upper MSD cover.

2 Disconnect the filament cable and ribbon cable from the top board.

The filament cable is the twisted pair of white wires.

3 Remove the black plastic cover from the front of the top board.

4 Measure the resistance between the FIL A and FIL test points.

If filament A is good, the resistance will be less than 1 ohm. An open circuit indicates the filament is burned out or not connected.

5 Measure the resistance between the FIL B and FIL test points.

If filament B is good, the resistance will be less than 1 ohm. An open circuit indicates the filament is burned out or not connected.

W A R N I N G This procedure involves exposure to potentially hazardous voltages. Do not perform this procedure unless you have been trained to service electronic equipment and work with hazardous voltages.

W A R N I N G Dangerous voltages are present on the top board.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 142 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 143: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

To test the filaments

143

6 Measure the resistance between the FIL A, FIL B, or FIL test point and

ground (GND).

The resistance should be greater than 1 megohm. A lower resistance indicates that one of the filaments is shorted to ground.

7 Reconnect the filament cable and ribbon cable.

8 Measure the dc voltage between the FIL test point and ground (GND).

The impedance of your voltmeter must be greater than 1 megohm. The voltage measured should be about -70 V dc. If this voltage is not present, replace the filament cable. If that does not correct the problem, contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer.

9 Measure the ac voltage between the FIL test point and the test point

corresponding to the active filament (filament 1 = FIL B, filament 2 =

FIL A).

The ac component is typically about 1 V but any ac voltage can be regarded as a successful test. If no ac voltage is present, replace the filament cable. If that does not correct the problem, contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer.

10 Reinstall the safety cover on the top board and reinstall the MSD cover.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 143 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 144: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

144

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

To test HP-IB communications

To test HP-IB communications

An error message such as Mass spectrometer interface card is not active indicates the possibility of a problem with the data system, HP-IB/MS control card, GC, ALS, or cables. Use the following checklist to eliminate some of the more common and easily corrected causes of system communication problems.

Verify communication with the GC by entering the Acquisition program.

Verify that the HP-IB addresses of the MSD, GC, and ALS correspond to

the addresses assigned to those devices in the data system software.

Ensure that all HP-IB connections are tight.

Verify that the HP-IB interface cable is in place on the GC.

Verify that the GC has memory Revision G, or later (HP 5890 GCs only).

Check that only the GC, MSD, and ALS are connected to the HP-IB loop.

If the problem persists, switch all instruments on the HP-IB loop off and

then on.

If the error message continues to appear, see To test the HP-IB/MS control card on page 145.

See Also HP 19257A HP-IB/RS-232 Interface Kit Installation and Setup Manual

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 144 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 145: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

To test the HP-IB/MS control card

145

To test the HP-IB/MS control card

If the initial checklist in To test HP-IB communications revealed no obvious causes for the error message, use the following test to verify that the HP-IB/MS control card is operating correctly.

Part 1

1 Make sure the MSD is on.

2 Test the +5 V power supply (page 148).

3 Make sure the HP-IB/MS control card is plugged in and cabled correctly.

Check both the HP-IB connector cable (internal) and the external HP-IB cable.

4 Switch the MSD off, then on. This is called “power cycling” the MSD.

5 Bring up the Manual Tune program.

6 Enter the SCINIT command on the command line to initialize the

HP-IB/MS control card.

7 If the HP-IB/MS control card does not respond, disconnect the GC and ALS

HP-IB cables.

Make sure the data system and MSD are the only devices on the HP-IB loop.

8 Power cycle the MSD.

9 Enter the SCINIT command on the command line to initialize the

HP-IB/MS control card.

If the message MS interface initialized appears (in 5 – 10 seconds), the HP-IB/MS control card is probably not the cause of the problem. Proceed to the GC/ALS test. If the HP-IB/MS control card still does not respond, proceed to Part 2.

C A U T I O N Do not power cycle the MSD if the diffusion pump is warm. If the pump is warm, disconnect the cable from the foreline gauge, wait 10 minutes, reconnect the cable, and then power cycle the MSD.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 145 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 146: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

146

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

To test the HP-IB/MS control card

Part 2

1 If the HP-IB/MS control card is still not responding, replace the internal

HP-IB connector cable.

2 Power cycle the MSD.

3 Enter the SCINIT command on the command line to initialize the

HP-IB/MS control card.

4 If the HP-IB/MS control card still does not respond, replace the external

HP-IB cable.

5 Power cycle the MSD.

6 Enter the SCINIT command on the command line to initialize the

HP-IB/MS control card.

7 If the HP-IB/MS control card still fails to respond, replace it or contact

your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 146 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 147: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

To test GC and ALS communications

147

To test GC and ALS communications

Before proceeding with the following test, the first 9 steps of To test the HP-IB/MS

control card on page 145 must have been completed successfully. This establishes that the HP-IB/MS control card operates correctly when the GC and ALS are disconnected, but not when they are connected.

To determine if the problem is associated with the GC or the ALS, proceed as follows:

1 Reconnect the GC to the HP-IB loop but leave the ALS disconnected.

2 Bring up the Edit MS Parameters panel in the Manual Tune program.

3 Power cycle the MSD.

4 Use the SCINIT command to reinitialize the HP-IB/MS control card.

If the message MS interface initialized appears (in 5 – 10 seconds), it indicates that the HP-IB/MS control card and the GC are operating correctly. The problem is most likely with the ALS.

5 To determine if the ALS is the cause of the problem, reconnect the ALS.

6 Power cycle both the GC and the MSD.

7 Use the SCINIT command to reinitialize the HP-IB/MS control card.

If the HP-IB/MS control card fails to initialize, it is likely that the problem is with the ALS. Contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 147 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 148: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

148

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

To test the power supply

To test the power supply

If you suspect the power supply is not working properly, use the following procedure to test it.

Materials needed Screwdriver, TORX T-15 (8710-1622)Voltmeter, HP E2378A or equivalent

1 With the MSD on, remove the upper and lower MSD covers.

2 Remove the safety cover from over the main board.

3 Measure the voltages between each of the four voltage test points and one

of the ground (GND) test points.

The test points are located on the lower right corner of the main board. The following table lists the acceptable voltage range for each test point.

W A R N I N G This procedure involves exposure to potentially hazardous voltages. Do not perform this procedure unless you have been trained to service electronic equipment and work with hazardous voltages.

W A R N I N G Dangerous voltages are present under the safety cover. Do not touch any wiring or components except with the voltmeter test probes.

Table 5 Expected voltages for power supply test points on the main board

Test point Voltage range (V dc)

+24V +23.92 to +28.08

+15V +14.25 to +15.75

-15V -15.75 to -14.25

+5V +4.75 to +5.15

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 148 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 149: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

To test the power supply

149

+24 V dc

+5 V dc

Ground

+15 V dc

-15 V dc

Ground

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 149 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 150: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

150

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

To test the power supply

All voltages are zero If all the voltages are zero, there are several possible causes.

• No connection between the power supply and the main board

• No connection between the power distribution board and the power supply

• Failed fuse on the power supply

1 Make sure the cable from the power supply board to the main board is

connected properly.

The cable connects to the back side of the main board below the calibration valve.

2 Shut down and vent the MSD (page 58).

3 Remove the electronics panel (page 243).

4 Make sure the cable from power supply to the power distribution panel is

connected properly.

5 Check the fuse on the power supply.

If this fuse fails, it indicates an event or power supply condition so serious that the entire power supply should be replaced. Contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer.

W A R N I N G Never attempt to remove this panel while the MSD is on.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 150 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 151: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

To test the power supply

151

Voltages are outside acceptable ranges

If voltages are present at the test points but outside the ranges listed as acceptable, the problem can be:

• A poor connection between the power supply cable and the main board

• A malfunctioning power supply (if the voltages are out of range by more than 10%)

1 Make sure the cable from the power supply board to the main board is

connected properly.

The cable connects to the back side of the main board below the calibration valve.

2 Contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 151 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 152: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

152

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

To test the calibration valve

To test the calibration valve

If symptoms indicate that the calibration valve in your MSD is not operating correctly, use the following procedure to test it.

Materials needed Screwdriver, TORX T-15 (8710-1622)Voltmeter, HP E2378A or equivalent

1 With the MSD on, remove the upper and lower MSD covers.

2 Check the calibration valve cable.

Make sure the cable is securely connected to the back of the main board.

3 Remove the safety cover from over the main board.

4 Connect a voltmeter across diode CR18.

Diode CR18 is located along the lower edge of the main board.

5 Initiate an autotune.

If the voltmeter registers in the 24 to 26 V dc range, then the calibration valve electronics are working correctly. Replace the valve or contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer. If zero voltage is registered, or if the voltage measured is significantly outside the range listed, then the electronics are not working correctly. Contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer.

See Also To remove the calibration valve, page 194

To reinstall the calibration valve, page 196

W A R N I N G This procedure involves exposure to potentially hazardous voltages. Do not perform this procedure unless you have been trained to service electronic equipment and work with hazardous voltages.

W A R N I N G Hazardous voltages (approximately 250 V dc) will be present on the main board.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 152 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 153: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

To test the calibration valve

153

Diode CR 18

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 153 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 154: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

154

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

To test the diffusion pump

To test the diffusion pump

If symptoms or error messages indicate that the diffusion pump is not working correctly, use this procedure to test the diffusion pump thermal switches and heater.

Materials needed Screwdriver, TORX T-15 (8710-1622)Ohmmeter or multimeter, HP E2378A or equivalent

1 Shut down and vent the MSD.

2 Remove the diffusion pump cover.

3 Disconnect the diffusion pump cable from the connector below the fan.

4 Measure the resistances of the thermal switches and heater through the

diffusion pump cable.

If the values you measure do not match the values listed in the following table, contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer.

W A R N I N G The diffusion pump may still be very hot. Make sure it has cooled before proceeding.

Table 6 Diffusion pump resistance values

Too cold switch (pins 8 & 9)

Too hot switch (pins 6 & 7)

Heater, 110 V (pins 2 & 3)

Heater, 220 V (pins 2 & 3)

Heater to ground (pins 1 & 2)

Operating temperature

< 0.5 ohms < 0.5 ohms ≅ 32 ohms ≅ 130 ohms > 20 megohms

Room temperature

> 20 megohms < 0.5 ohms ≅ 32 ohms ≅ 130 ohms > 20 megohms

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 154 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 155: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

To test the diffusion pump

155

9 Too cold (white)

2 Heater line (white/blue)

6 Too hot (red)

3 Heater neutral (white)

1 Ground (green/yellow)

7 Too hot (red)

8 Too cold (white)

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 155 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 156: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

156

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

To test the ion source

To test the ion source

A dirty ion source is one of the more common causes of poor sensitivity and other performance problems. All ion sources eventually become dirty. How quickly the ion source in your MSD will become dirty depends on several factors:

• Number of samples analyzed

• Type of samples analyzed

• Operating conditions

Even if it were easy to inspect, a dirty ion source does not always look dirty. Fortunately, clues to the condition of the ion source can be determined from tune reports. It is best if you have kept a log of tune reports. Historical trends can provide much valuable information.

If, after following this procedure, you determine that the ion source is dirty, its performance can be restored by following the cleaning procedure in Chapter 4.

See Also To clean the ion source, page 212

Materials needed None (log of tune reports is helpful)

1 Examine the log of tune reports.

The following progressive changes over time can indicate the ion source is becoming dirty:

• Steadily increasing ion focus voltage

• Steadily decreasing entrance lens offset (in standard spectra autotune)

• Steadily increasing repeller voltage (the repeller voltage is fixed in the standard spectra autotune)

• Steadily increasing electron multiplier voltage

• Steadily poorer low-mass resolution

• Steadily decreasing relative abundance of m/z 502

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 156 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 157: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

3 Troubleshooting the MSD

To test the ion source

157

2 Perform either a standard spectra autotune or a maximum sensitivity

autotune.

With a standard sensitivity autotune, signs of a dirty ion source include:

• A relative abundance of m/z 502 less than 2%

• Entrance lens offset less than 1.0

With the maximum sensitivity autotune, signs of a dirty ion source include:

• A relative abundance of m/z 502 less than 0.15%

• A relative abundance of m/z 219 less than 20%

• The repeller is at maximum (the default maximum is 30 V)

3 Ramp the repeller voltage.

Call up the Manual Tune program. Ramp the repeller voltage. A clean ion source will generate a response curve with a single, well-defined peak between 15 and 30 volts. As an ion source becomes dirty, the peak will shift higher and higher until it occurs at the maximum repeller voltage (42.8 V). A dirty ion source can also show little or no response at lower repeller voltages with a sudden step and a steep response curve after the step. With this type of response, the peak is still at the maximum repeller voltage. If the step occurs above 25 V, the standard spectra autotune, which runs the repeller at a fixed 25 volts, will not function properly.

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 157 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 158: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

158

iq72.bk : chapter3 Page 158 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 159: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4

Maintaining the MSD

How to perform common maintenance procedures for the MSD

Before starting, 160Maintaining the vacuum system, 167Maintaining the analyzer, 202Maintaining the GC interface, 229Maintaining the electronics, 238

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 159 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 160: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

160

Before starting

You can perform most of the maintenance required by your MSD. For your safety, read all of the information in this introduction before performing any maintenance tasks.

Some parts of the MSD require regularly scheduled maintenance

Common maintenance tasks are listed in Table 7. Performing these tasks on a regular basis can reduce operating problems, prolong system life, and reduce overall operating costs.

Keep a record of system performance (tune reports) and maintenance operations performed. This makes it easier to identify variations from normal operation and to take corrective action.

Table 7 Maintenance schedule

Task Everyweek

Every3 weeks

Every6 months

Everyyear

Asneeded

Tune the MSD ✓

Check the foreline pump fluid level ✓

Check and, if necessary, refill thecalibration vial

Replace the foreline pump fluid ✓

Replace the foreline trap pellets ✓

Check and, if necessary, replace the diffusion pump fluid

Clean the ion source ✓

Check the carrier gas trap ✓

Replace the worn out parts such as filamentsand the electron multiplier

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 160 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 161: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

161

Maintenance requires the proper tools, spare parts, and supplies

Some of the required tools, spare parts, and supplies are included in the MSD shipping kit or MSD tool kit. Others you must supply yourself. Each maintenance procedure includes a list of the materials required for that procedure. Tables 8 summarizes these.

Table 8 Tools

Description HP part number

Ball driver

1.5-mm 8710-1570

2.0-mm 8710-1804

Hex nut driver, 1/4-inch 8720-0002

Pliers, long-nose (1.5-inch nose) 8710-1094

Ruler, metal, metric ————

Screwdriver

flat-blade, large 8730-0002

Pozidriv, #1 (small) 8710-0899

Pozidriv, #2 (large) 8710-0900

TORX, T-10 (small) 8710-1623

TORX, T-15 (large) 8710-1622

Tweezers, non-magnetic 8710-0907

Wrench, open-end, 1/4-inch x 5/16-inch 8710-0510

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 161 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 162: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

162

4 Maintaining the MSD

Table 9 Spare parts and supplies

Description HP part number

Abrasive paper 5061-5896Alumina abrasive powder 8660-0791Aluminum foil, clean ————Beakers, glass, 50 ml and 500 ml ————Cloths, clean, lint-free 05980-60051Cotton swabs 5080-5400Diffusion pump fluid 6040-0809Electron multiplier horn 05971-80103Filament assembly 05972-60053Foreline pump fluid

1 liter 6040-08341 gallon 6040-0798

Foreline trap pellets (molecular sieve) 9301-1104GC interface heater/sensor assembly

HP 5972A MSD (110 V ac heater) 05971-60105HP 6890 Series MSD (40 V dc heater) 05972-60106

Gloveschemical-resistant ————clean, lint-free (large) 8650-0030clean, lint-free (small) 8650-0029

PFTBA sample kit 05971-60571Solvents, reagent-grade

acetone ————methanol ————methylene chloride ————

Ultrasonic bath ————

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 162 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 163: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

163

Many parts of the MSD carry high voltages that are

potentially dangerous

Whenever the MSD is plugged in, even if the power switch (circuit breaker) is off, potentially dangerous voltage (110/120 V ac or 220/240Vac) exists on:

• The wiring between where the power cord enters the instrument and the power switch

When the power switch is on, potentially dangerous voltages exist on:

• Main board

• Power distribution board

• Power supply

• Top board

• Wires and cables between these boards

• Wires and cables between these boards and the connectors on the back panel of the MSD

Normally, all of these parts are shielded by safety covers. As long as these safety covers are in place, it should be difficult to accidentally make contact with dangerous voltages.

One or two procedures in this chapter require access to the inside of the MSD while it is on. In each procedure, there is no reason to remove any of the electronics safety covers. The danger of accidental shock will be small as long as the procedures are followed carefully.

W A R N I N G Under no circumstances should any maintenance procedure which requires the removal of an electronics safety cover be performed unless the MSD is switched off and its power cord disconnected.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 163 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 164: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

164

4 Maintaining the MSD

If your instrument is equipped with the optional gauge controller, potential-ly dangerous voltage also exists where the cable from the gauge controller connects to the triode gauge tube. Turn off the gauge controller if you are going to be working near the triode gauge tube.

Many parts are hot enough to be dangerous

Many parts in the MSD operate at or reach temperatures high enough to cause serious burns. These parts include but are not limited to:

• GC interface

• Radiator

• Ion source

• Quadrupole mass filter

• Diffusion pump

• Foreline pump

Never touch these parts while the instrument is on. After the MSD is turned off, give these parts plenty of time to cool before handling them. This is especially true of the GC interface and diffusion pump.

W A R N I N G Because the temperature of the GC interface is controlled by the GC, the interface can be on and at a dangerously high temperature even though the MSD is off. After it is turned off, the GC interface cools very slowly. This is especially true if the GC oven is at an elevated temperature.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 164 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 165: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

165

Chemical residue is another potential danger

Not all of your sample is ionized by the ion source. The majority of any sample passes through the ion source without being ionized and is pumped away by the vacuum system. As a result, the exhaust from the foreline pump will contain traces of the carrier gas and your samples. Treat pump exhaust as toxic.

Use a hose to vent the exhaust from the foreline pump outside or into a fume hood. Be sure to comply with your local air quality regulations.

The fluids in the diffusion pump and foreline pump also collect traces of the samples being analyzed. All used pump fluid should be considered hazardous waste and handled accordingly. Dispose of used fluid correctly, as specified by your local regulations.

W A R N I N G Exhaust from the foreline pump may contain toxic chemicals and should never be vented into the laboratory.

W A R N I N G When replacing pump fluid, use chemical-resistant gloves and safety glasses. Avoid all contact with the fluid.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 165 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 166: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

166

4 Maintaining the MSD

Electrostatic discharge is a threat to the MSD electronics during

maintenance

All of the printed circuit boards in the MSD contain components that can be damaged by electrostatic discharge (ESD). Do not handle or touch these boards unless absolutely necessary. When you must handle these boards, always use a grounded wrist strap and take other anti-static precautions. The grounded wrist strap should be connected to the main MSD ground point. The ground point is located near the main power wiring. It is labeled with the international symbol for ground. Handle printed circuit boards by their edges and avoid touching components or traces.

C A U T I O N In order to be effective, an anti-static wrist strap must fit snugly (not tight). A loose strap provides little or no protection.

C A U T I O N Even anti-static precautions are not 100% effective. Handle electronic circuit boards as little as possible.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 166 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 167: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

167

Maintaining the vacuum system

The vacuum system requires some periodic maintenance

As listed earlier in Table 7, some maintenance tasks for the vacuum system must be performed periodically. These include:

• Checking the foreline pump fluid (every week)

• Checking the calibration vial (every 3 weeks)

• Replacing the foreline pump fluid (every 6 months)

• Replacing the foreline trap pellets (every 6 months)

• Checking the diffusion pump fluid (every year)

Failure to perform these tasks as scheduled can result in decreased instrument performance. It can also result in damage to your instrument.

Other procedures should be performed as needed

Tasks such as replacing a foreline vacuum gauge or triode gauge should be performed only when needed. See Chapter 3, Troubleshooting the MSD, on page 63 for symptoms that indicate this type of maintenance is required.

More information is available

If you need more information about the locations or functions of vacuum system components, refer to Chapter 5, Vacuum System on page 249.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 167 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 168: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

168

4 Maintaining the MSD

To check and add foreline pump fluid

To check and add foreline pump fluid

Materials needed:

Foreline pump fluid (6040-0834)Funnel

1 Examine the pump fluid window. The fluid level should be well above the lower line.

If the fluid level is near or below the lower mark, add foreline pump fluid. Follow the remaining steps in this procedure to add pump fluid.

WARNING Never attempt to add pump fluid while the foreline pump is on.

If your MSD is nearing its scheduled time for replacement of the foreline pump fluid, replace the fluid instead of just adding pump fluid.

2 Vent and switch off the MSD (page 58).

Lower line

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 168 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 169: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To check and add foreline pump fluid

169

3 Remove the fill cap from the top of the foreline pump. There are two fill caps. Either one will work.

4 Add pump fluid until the fluid level in the window is near, but not above, the upper line.

5 Reinstall the fill cap. 6 Reinstall the GC column. Start up and pump down the MSD (page 40).

Upper line

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 169 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 170: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

170

4 Maintaining the MSD

To drain the foreline pump

To drain the foreline pump

Materials needed:

Container for catching old pump fluid, 500 mlGloves, chemical-resistant

1 Vent and switch off the MSD (page 58).

2 Remove the fill cap. Place a container under the drain plug.

3 Remove the drain plug. Allow the pump fluid to drain out.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 170 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 171: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To drain the foreline pump

171

4 Plug the MSD power cord into its electrical outlet. 5 Switch the MSD power switch on and immediately off. Do not leave it on.

6 Unplug the MSD power cord from its electrical outlet.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 171 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 172: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

172

4 Maintaining the MSD

To fill the foreline pump

To fill the foreline pump

Materials needed:

Foreline pump fluid (6040-0834)FunnelGloves, chemical-resistantScrewdriver, flat-bladed, large (8730-0002)

1 Drain the foreline pump fluid (page 170).

2 Reinstall the drain plug. 3 Add foreline pump fluid until the fluid level in the window is near, but not above, the upper line.

Upper line

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 172 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 173: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To fill the foreline pump

173

4 Reinstall the fill cap. 5 Reinstall the GC column. Start up and pump down the MSD (page 40).

6 Turn the ballast switch to position 1. The pump will become noisier. Wait 10 minutes.

7 Turn the ballast switch back to position 0. Always use position 0 for normal operation.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 173 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 174: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

174

4 Maintaining the MSD

To remove the foreline trap pellets

To remove the foreline trap pellets

Materials needed:

Cloths, clean, lint-free (05980-60051)Gloves, chemical-resistantScrewdriver, flat-bladed, large (8730-0002)

1 Vent and switch off the MSD (page 58).

2 Disconnect the foreline trap from the foreline pump. Remove the top of the trap.

3 Remove the screen from the top of the trap. Do not remove the second screen at the bottom of the trap.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 174 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 175: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To remove the foreline trap pellets

175

4 Dispose of the pellets in the trap. Treat the pellets as hazardous waste.

5 Wipe the interior of the trap with a clean, lint-free cloth.

CAUTION Remove the inlet filter from the O-ring assembly before rinsing the filter. Solvents will damage the O-ring.

CAUTION Reinstall the filter pointed-end first through the O-ring assembly. If incorrectly assembled, the filter will disable the anti-suckback valve.

The inlet filter is not essential to pump opera-tion. If you cannot clean it, you can discard it. If the O-ring is dirty, wipe it with a clean, lint-free cloth.

6 Inspect the inlet filter. If the filter is dirty, remove it and rinse it in a solvent such as isopropyl alcohol.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 175 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 176: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

176

4 Maintaining the MSD

To add foreline trap pellets

To add foreline trap pellets

Materials needed:

Gloves, chemical-resistantPellets, molecular sieve (9301-1104)

1 Remove the old foreline trap pellets (page 174).

2 Open a new can of foreline trap pellets (molecular sieve).

3 Pour the new pellets into the trap until it is almost full.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 176 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 177: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To add foreline trap pellets

177

4 Reinstall the screen. 5 Place the trap in the GC oven. Bake it at 250°C for 2 hours. Do not bake O-rings.

6 Reassemble the trap. Reinstall it on the foreline pump.

7 Reinstall the GC column. Start up and pump down the MSD (page 40).

250°C

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 177 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 178: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

178

4 Maintaining the MSD

To remove the diffusion pump

To remove the diffusion pump

Materials needed:

Screwdriver, TORX T-15 (8710-1622)

1 Vent and switch off the MSD (page 58).

2 Disconnect the foreline vacuum gauge fitting from the diffusion pump outlet.

3 Remove the diffusion pump cover.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 178 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 179: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To remove the diffusion pump

179

4 Remove the KF50 clamp. Lower the diffusion pump to the table.

5 Disconnect the diffusion pump cable from the connector on the back panel.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 179 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 180: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

180

4 Maintaining the MSD

To check the diffusion pump fluid

To check the diffusion pump fluid

Materials needed:

Aluminum foil, cleanGloves, chemical-resistantPliers, long-nosed (8710-1094)Ruler, metal, metric

1 Remove the diffusion pump (page 178).

2 Remove the coseal (O-ring assembly). Cover the top of the diffusion pump with aluminum foil.

3 Place the diffusion pump in your GC oven. Heat it at 60°C for 15 minutes.

60°C

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 180 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 181: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To check the diffusion pump fluid

181

4 Remove the retaining clip from the top of the diffusion pump stack.

5 Remove the components of the diffusion pump stack.

The diffusion pump fluid should be clear or slightly tinted. Cloudy or dark fluid can indi-cate an air leak or excessive water in the sys-tem. If the fluid is cloudy or dark, replace it (page 182). Check for air leaks (page 124) and correct any leaks you find.

6 Dip a metal ruler into the diffusion pump fluid. The fluid should be 8 to 10 mm deep.

7 Check the color of the pump fluid.

Too much

Not enough

OK

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 181 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 182: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

182

4 Maintaining the MSD

To replace the diffusion pump fluid

To replace the diffusion pump fluid

Materials needed:

Cloths, clean, lint-free (05980-60051)Diffusion pump fluid (6040-0809)Gloves, chemical-resistantMethylene chloride, reagent-grade

1 Follow steps 1 through 5 of To check the diffusion

pump fluid on page 180.

2 Drain the old diffusion pump fluid. Treat the old pump fluid as hazardous waste.

3 Rinse the interior of the pump with methylene chloride. Wipe it clean with a clean cloth.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 182 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 183: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To replace the diffusion pump fluid

183

4 Wipe clean the interior of the vacuum manifold above where the pump attaches.

5 Pour the pre-measured tube of diffusion pump fluid into the diffusion pump.

6 Reinstall the stack components. 7 Reinstall the stack retaining clip.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 183 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 184: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

184

4 Maintaining the MSD

To reinstall the diffusion pump fluid

To reinstall the diffusion pump fluid

Materials needed:

Screwdriver, TORX T-15 (8710-1622)Vacuum cleaner, non-ESD generating (HP 92175V

or equivalent)

1 Vacuum the fan and the cooling fins on the diffusion pump to remove accumulated dust.

2 Reconnect the diffusion pump cable to the connector on the back panel.

3 Reinstall the diffusion pump and clamp. Do not forget the coseal (O-ring assembly).

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 184 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 185: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To reinstall the diffusion pump fluid

185

4 Reinstall the diffusion pump cover. 5 Reconnect the foreline vacuum gauge fitting to the outlet of the diffusion pump.

6 Reinstall the GC column. Start up and pump down the MSD (page 40).

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 185 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 186: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

186

4 Maintaining the MSD

To remove the calibration vial

To remove the calibration vial

Materials needed:

Screwdriver, TORX T-15 (8710-1622)

1 Stop any tuning or data acquisition in progress. Turn off the analyzer (MSOFF command).

2 If your MSD is equipped with a gauge controller, switch off the triode gauge and the gauge controller.

3 Remove the upper and lower MSD covers. Re- member to disconnect the status display cable.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 186 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 187: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To remove the calibration vial

187

4 Locate the calibration valve. 5 Loosen the fitting. Pull the calibration vial out. You may feel some resistance due to residual vacuum.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 187 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 188: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

188

4 Maintaining the MSD

To fill and reinstall the calibration vial

To fill and reinstall the calibration vial

Materials needed:

PFTBA (05971-60571) or other tuning compoundScrewdriver, TORX T-15 (8710-1622)

1 Remove the calibration vial (page 186).

2 Pour the calibration compound into the vial. Leave 1/4-inch of the vial unfilled.

3 Push the calibration vial into the valve as far as it will go.

1/4 inch

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 188 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 189: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To fill and reinstall the calibration vial

189

4 Withdraw the vial 1 mm. This prevents damage when the thumbscrew is tightened.

5 Tighten the fitting.

CAUTION Failure to purge the calibration valve will result in damage to the electron multiplier.

6 Reconnect the status display cable. Reinstall the MSD covers.

7 Select Purge Cal Valve from the Vacuum menu to purge the air from the calibration valve.

1 mm

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 189 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 190: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

190

4 Maintaining the MSD

To remove the foreline gauge

To remove the foreline gauge

Materials needed:

Screwdriver, flat-bladed, large (8730-0002)

1 Vent and switch off the MSD (page 58).

2 Unplug the blue connector from the foreline gauge. 3 Disconnect the foreline gauge fitting from the outlet of the diffusion pump.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 190 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 191: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To remove the foreline gauge

191

4 Loosen the hose clamp. 5 Pull the foreline gauge assembly out of the foreline hose.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 191 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 192: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

192

4 Maintaining the MSD

To reinstall the foreline gauge

To reinstall the foreline gauge

Materials needed:

Foreline gauge assembly (05972-60545)Screwdriver, flat-bladed, large (8730-0002)

1 Connect a new foreline gauge assembly to the fore-line hose.

2 Tighten the hose clamp. 3 Reconnect the foreline gauge fitting to the outlet of the diffusion pump.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 192 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 193: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To reinstall the foreline gauge

193

4 Reconnect the blue connector to the foreline gauge. 5 Reinstall the GC column. Start up and pump down the MSD (page 40).

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 193 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 194: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

194

4 Maintaining the MSD

To remove the calibration valve

To remove the calibration valve

Materials needed:

Screwdriver, TORX T-15 (8710-1622)Wrench

11/16-inch, open-end3/4-inch, open-end

1 Vent and switch off the MSD (page 58).

2 Remove the upper and lower MSD covers. Re- member to disconnect the status display cable.

3 Disconnect the calibration valve cable from the back of the main board.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 194 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 195: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To remove the calibration valve

195

4 Loosen the calibration valve nut. Use a second wrench to prevent the upper nut from turning.

5 Remove the calibration valve assembly.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 195 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 196: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

196

4 Maintaining the MSD

To reinstall the calibration valve

To reinstall the calibration valve

Materials needed:

Screwdriver, TORX T-15 (8710-1622)Wrench

11/16-inch, open-end3/4-inch, open-end

1 Remove the old calibration valve (page 194).

2 Unpack the new calibration valve. Slide it onto the fitting.

3 Tighten the calibration valve nut. Use a second wrench to keep the upper nut from turning.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 196 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 197: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To reinstall the calibration valve

197

4 Connect the calibration valve wiring to the connector on the main board.

5 Fill the calibration vial (page 188).

CAUTION After pumping down the instrument, select Purge Cal Valve from the Vacuum menu to purge the air from the calibration valve. Failure to purge the calibration valve will result in damage to the electron multiplier.

6 Reconnect the status display cable. Reinstall the MSD covers.

7 Reinstall the GC column. Start up and pump down the MSD (page 40).

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 197 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 198: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

198

4 Maintaining the MSD

To remove the triode gauge tube

To remove the triode gauge tube

Materials needed:

Screwdriver, TORX T-15 (8710-1622)

1 Vent and switch off the MSD (page 58).

2 Remove the upper and lower MSD covers. Re- member to disconnect the status display cable.

3 Disconnect the blue connector from the triode gauge tube.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 198 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 199: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To remove the triode gauge tube

199

4 Loosen the knurled O-ring collar by turning it counterclockwise.

5 Pull the triode gauge tube out of the fitting. Remove the baffle from the stem of the tube.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 199 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 200: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

200

4 Maintaining the MSD

To reinstall a triode gauge tube

To reinstall a triode gauge tube

Materials needed:

Screwdriver, TORX T-15 (8710-1622)Triode gauge tube (0960-0897)

1 Remove the old triode gauge tube (page 198).

2 Slide the baffle into the stem of the new triode gauge tube.

3 Install the tube into the fitting. Leave 3 mm of the metal sleeve exposed.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 200 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 201: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To reinstall a triode gauge tube

201

4 Tighten the knurled O-ring collar. Do not over-tighten, you can break the tube.

5 Reconnect the connector to the triode gauge tube.

6 Reconnect the status display cable. Reinstall the MSD covers.

7 Reinstall the GC column. Start up and pump down the MSD (page 40).

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 201 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 202: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

202

Maintaining the analyzer

The analyzer requires no periodic maintenance

None of the analyzer components requires periodic maintenance. Some tasks, however, must be performed when MSD performance indicates they are necessary. These tasks include:

• Cleaning the ion source

• Replacing filaments

• Replacing the electron multiplier horn

Chapter 3, Troubleshooting the MSD, on page 63 provides more information about symptoms that indicate the need for analyzer maintenance.

Care must be taken during analyzer maintenance to keep

components clean

All analyzer maintenance involves removing the analyzer from the MSD. Clean gloves should be work during all analyzer maintenance procedures. After cleaning the ion source, the parts must be thoroughly dried before they are reinstalled.

C A U T I O N If not done correctly, analyzer maintenance can introduce contaminants into the MSD.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 202 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 203: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

203

Some analyzer parts should not be disturbed

The quadrupole mass filter requires no periodic maintenance. It should never be removed or otherwise disturbed.

If necessary, acetone, hexane, and freon can be used safely near the mass filter.

More information is available

If you need more information about the locations or functions of analyzer components, refer to Chapter 5, Vacuum System, on page 249.

C A U T I O N The mass filter can be damaged by water and solvents with free chloride. They should never be used near the mass filter.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 203 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 204: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

204

4 Maintaining the MSD

To remove the analyzer

To remove the analyzer

Materials needed:

Gloves, clean, lint-freelarge (8650-0030)small (8650-0029)

Screwdriver, TORX T-15 (8710-1622)Wrench, open-end, 1/4-inch × 5/16-inch (8710-0510)

1 Vent and switch off the MSD (page 58).

2 Slide the MSD away from the GC. Switch off the GC and then disconnect the GC interface cable.

3 Disconnect and remove the GC interface.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 204 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 205: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To remove the analyzer

205

4 Remove the upper cover of the MSD. 5 Disconnect the ribbon cable, filament cable, and signal cable.

6 Remove the shipping clamps if they are still in place. 7 Lift the analyzer out of the MSD. Turn the analyzer over and set it on its rubber feet.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 205 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 206: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

206

4 Maintaining the MSD

To reinstall the analyzer

To reinstall the analyzer

Materials needed:

Gloves, clean, lint-freelarge (8650-0030)small (8650-0029)

Screwdriver, TORX T-15 (8710-1622)Wrench, open-end, 1/4-inch × 5/16-inch (8710-0510)

1 Lower the analyzer into position in the vacuum man-ifold.

2 Reconnect the ribbon cable, filament cable, and signal cable.

3 Reinstall the upper cover on the MSD.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 206 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 207: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To reinstall the analyzer

207

4 Reinstall the GC interface. Replace the coseal if it is worn or damaged.

5 Reconnect the GC interface cable to the GC. Move the MSD to its normal location.

6 Reinstall the GC column. Start up and pump down the MSD (page 40).

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 207 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 208: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

208

4 Maintaining the MSD

To remove the ion source

To remove the ion source

Materials needed:

Gloves, clean, lint-freelarge (8650-0030)small (8650-0029)

Hex ball driver, 1.5-mm (8710-1570)Pliers, long-nose (8710-1094)

1 Remove the analyzer (page 204).

2 Disconnect the seven electrical leads from the ion source. Pull on the connectors, not on the wires.

3 Unscrew and remove the GC interface socket.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 208 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 209: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To remove the ion source

209

4 Remove the two screws that hold the ion source in place. Remove the ion source.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 209 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 210: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

210

4 Maintaining the MSD

To disassemble the ion source

To disassemble the ion source

Materials needed:

Gloves, clean, lint-freelarge (8650-0030)small (8650-0029)

Hex ball driver, 1.5-mm (8710-1570)

1 Remove the ion source (page 208).

2 Remove the filament retaining screws. Remove the filaments.

3 Pull the repeller assembly out of the source body.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 210 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 211: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To disassemble the ion source

211

4 Remove the set screw. Push out the remaining ion source components.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 211 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 212: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

212

4 Maintaining the MSD

To clean the ion source

To clean the ion source

Materials needed:

Abrasive paper (5061-5896)Alumina abrasive powder (8660-0791)Aluminum foil, cleanCloths, clean (05980-60051)Cotton swabs (5080-5400)Glass beakers, 50 and 500 mlGloves, clean, lint-free

large (8650-0030)small (8650-0029)

Solventsacetone, reagent-grademethanol, reagent-grademethylene chloride, reagent grade

Ultrasonic bath

1 Disassemble the ion source (page 210).

Do not clean the filament assemblies. If the lens insulators are dirty, clean them with a cot-ton swab dampened with reagent-grade metha-nol. If that does not clean the insulators, replace them. Do not abrasively or ultrasoni-cally clean the lens insulators.

CAUTION The following steps do not apply to the filament assemblies or lens insulators.

2 Separate the filament assemblies and the lens insulators from the other parts.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 212 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 213: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To clean the ion source

213

Use abrasive paper or an abrasive slurry of alu-mina powder and reagent-grade methanol on a cotton swab. The slurry is preferred because it is less abrasive. Use only enough force to remove the discolorations. It is not necessary to polish the parts.

3 Abrasively clean discolored surfaces that contact the sample or ion beam.

4 Rinse away all abrasive residue with reagent-grade methanol before ultrasonic cleaning.

5 Separate the parts that were abrasively cleaned from the parts that were not abrasively cleaned.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 213 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 214: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

214

4 Maintaining the MSD

To clean the ion source

Clean the parts for 15 minutes in each of the following solvents:

• Methylene chloride (reagent-grade)

• Acetone (reagent-grade)

• Methanol (reagent-grade)

WARNING All of these solvents are hazardous. Work in a fume hood and take appropriate precautions.

6 Ultrasonically clean each group of parts separately.

7 Place the parts in a clean beaker. Loosely cover the beaker with clean aluminum foil.

8 Dry the cleaned parts in an oven at 50°C for 30 minutes.

50°C

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 214 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 215: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To clean the ion source

215

Take care to avoid recontaminating cleaned and dried parts. Put on a new, clean pair of gloves before handling the parts.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 215 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 216: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

216

4 Maintaining the MSD

To reassemble the ion source

To reassemble the ion source

Materials needed:

Gloves, clean, lint-freelarge (8650-0030)small (8650-0029)

Hex ball driver, 1.5-mm (8710-1570)

1 Slide the drawout plate and the drawout cylinder into the source body.

2 Assemble the ion focus lens, entrance lens, and lens insulators.

3 Slide the assembled components into the source body. Reinstall the set screw.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 216 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 217: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To reassemble the ion source

217

4 Reinstall the repeller assembly. 5 Slide the filament assemblies onto the repeller assembly. Reinstall the screws.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 217 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 218: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

218

4 Maintaining the MSD

To reinstall the ion source

To reinstall the ion source

Materials needed:

Gloves, clean, lint-freelarge (8650-0030)small (8650-0029)

Hex ball driver, 1.5-mm (8710-1570)Pliers, long-nose (8710-1094)

1 Slide the ion source into the radiator. Reinstall the two retaining screws.

2 Reinstall the GC interface socket. Tighten it. 3 Reconnect the electrical leads to the ion source.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 218 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 219: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To reinstall the ion source

219

4 Reinstall the analyzer (page 206).

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 219 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 220: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

220

4 Maintaining the MSD

To remove a filament

To remove a filament

Materials needed:

Gloves, clean, lint-freelarge (8650-0030)small (8650-0029)

Hex ball driver, 1.5-mm (8710-1570)Screwdriver, TORX T-15 (8710-1622)

1 Vent and switch off the MSD (page 58).

2 Remove the analyzer (page 204). 3 Remove the ion source (page 208).

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 220 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 221: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To remove a filament

221

4 Remove the filament to be replaced.

Filament 1

Filament 2

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 221 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 222: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

222

4 Maintaining the MSD

To reinstall a filament

To reinstall a filament

Materials needed:

Filament assembly (05972-60053)Gloves, clean, lint-free

large (8650-0030)small (8650-0029)

Hex ball driver, 1.5-mm (8710-1570)Screwdriver, TORX T-15 (8710-1622)

1 Install a new filament assembly. Reinstall the retain-ing screw.

2 Reinstall the ion source (page 218). 3 Reinstall the analyzer (page 206).

Filament 1

Filament 2

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 222 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 223: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To reinstall a filament

223

4 Autotune the MSD. Use the filament that gives the best results.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 223 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 224: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

224

4 Maintaining the MSD

To remove the electron multiplier horn

To remove the electron multiplier horn

Materials needed:

Gloves, clean, lint-freelarge (8650-0030)small (8650-0029)

1 Vent and switch off the MSD (page 58).

2 Remove the analyzer (page 204). 3 Disconnect the signal lead from the electron multiplier.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 224 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 225: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To remove the electron multiplier horn

225

4 Open the retaining clip. 5 Remove the electron multiplier horn.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 225 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 226: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

226

4 Maintaining the MSD

To reinstall the electron multiplier horn

To reinstall the electron multiplier horn

Materials needed:

Electron multiplier horn (05971-80103)Gloves, clean, lint-free

large (8650-0030)small (8650-0029)

1 Remove the old electron multiplier horn (page 224).

2 Install a new electron multiplier horn. 3 Close the retaining clip.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 226 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 227: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To reinstall the electron multiplier horn

227

4 Reconnect the signal lead to the electron multiplier horn.

5 Reinstall the analyzer (page 206).

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 227 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 228: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

228

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 228 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 229: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

229

Maintaining the GC interface

The GC interface requires no periodic maintenance

Rarely, the heater cartridge in the GC interface fails. In those cases, it is necessary to replace the heater/sensor assembly. This section contains procedures for removing the heater/sensor assembly and installing a new one.

More information is available

If you need more information about the locations or functions of GC interface components, refer to Chapter 6, GC Interface, on page 271.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 229 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 230: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

230

4 Maintaining the MSD

To remove the heater/sensor assembly (HP 5972A)

To remove the heater/sensor assembly (HP 5972A)

Materials needed:

Screwdriver, Pozidriv #1 (8710-0899)

1 Vent and switch off the MSD (page 58).

2 Slide the MSD away from the GC. Switch off the GC and then disconnect the GC interface cable.

3 Slide the insulation off the GC interface.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 230 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 231: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To remove the heater/sensor assembly (HP 5972A)

231

4 Loosen the four heater sleeve screws. Slide the heater sleeve off the GC interface.

5 Remove the ground screw. Remove the ground wire from the heater sleeve.

6 Remove the heater and sensor from the heater sleeve.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 231 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 232: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

232

4 Maintaining the MSD

To reinstall the heater/sensor assembly (HP 5972A)

To reinstall the heater/sensor assembly (HP 5972A)

Materials needed:

Screwdriver, Pozidriv #1 (8710-0899)Heater/sensor assembly (05971-60105)

1 Slide the new heater and sensor into the heater sleeve.

Either wrap the ground wire around the ground screw (inside the hole) or make sure the ground screw presses the ground wire against the heater sleeve. The ground wire must make good contact with the heater sleeve.

2 Insert the ground wire into the hole. Reinstall the ground screw and lockwasher.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 232 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 233: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To reinstall the heater/sensor assembly (HP 5972A)

233

3 Slide the heater sleeve onto the GC interface. Tighten the screws evenly.

4 Slide the insulation onto the GC interface.

5 Reconnect the GC interface cable to the GC. Move the MSD back next to the GC.

6 Reinstall the GC column. Start up and pump down the MSD (page 40).

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 233 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 234: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

234

4 Maintaining the MSD

To remove the heater/sensor assembly (HP 6890 Series)

To remove the heater/sensor assembly (HP 6890 Series)

Materials needed:

Screwdriver, Pozidriv #1 (8710-0899)

1 Vent and switch off the MSD (page 58).

2 Slide the MSD away from the GC. Switch off the GC and then disconnect the GC interface cable.

3 Slide the insulation off the GC interface.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 234 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 235: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To remove the heater/sensor assembly (HP 6890 Series)

235

4 Loosen the four heater sleeve screws. Slide the heater sleeve off the GC interface.

5 Remove the heater and sensor from the heater sleeve.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 235 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 236: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

236

4 Maintaining the MSD

To reinstall the heater/sensor assembly (HP 6890 Series)

To reinstall the heater/sensor assembly (HP 6890 Series)

Materials needed:

Screwdriver, Pozidriv #1 (8710-0899)Heater/sensor assembly (05972-60106)

1 Slide the new heater and sensor into the heater sleeve.

2 Slide the heater sleeve onto the GC interface. Tighten the screws evenly.

3 Slide the insulation onto the GC interface.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 236 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 237: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To reinstall the heater/sensor assembly (HP 6890 Series)

237

4 Reconnect the GC interface cable to the GC. Slide the MSD back next to the GC.

5 Reinstall the GC column. Start up and pump down the MSD (page 40).

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 237 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 238: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

238

Maintaining the electronics

The MSD electronics do not require any scheduled maintenance

None of the electronic components of the MSD need to be replaced on a regular schedule. None of the electronic components in the MSD need to be adjusted or calibrated on a regular schedule. Avoid unnecessary handling of the MSD electronics.

On rare occasions, it may be necessary to replace a fuse or one of

the printed circuit boards

The procedures in this section outline the steps required to replace some of the major electronic components of the MSD. These procedures are intended primarily for Hewlett-Packard service personnel. Do not attempt to use these procedures unless you have received previous training in the maintenance of the MSD electronics.

If you experience problems with the electronics in your MSD, the best thing to do is contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer.

More information is available

If you need more information about the locations or functions of electronic components, refer to Chapter 8, Electronics, on page 289.

W A R N I N G Improper use of these procedures could create a serious safety hazard. Improper use of these procedures could also result in serious damage to, or incorrect operation of, the MSD.

W A R N I N G Vent the MSD and disconnect its power cord before performing any of these procedures except adjusting the RF coils.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 238 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 239: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To replace the top board

239

To replace the top board

Materials needed:

Hex nut driver, 1/4-inch (8720-0002)Screwdriver

TORX T-10 (8710-1623)TORX T-15 (8710-1622)

Top board (05971-69001)

Special considerations

• Take full anti-static precautions.

• Be careful when disconnecting the 9-pin con-nector from the 9-pin feedthrough in the top plate. It is easy to damage the top board and the feedthrough pins.

• Make sure the pins of the 9-pin feedthrough in the top plate are straight before installing a new top board.

• You will have to adjust the RF coils after in-stalling a new top board.

Steps

1 Vent the MSD.

2 Remove the upper MSD cover.

3 Reinstall and tighten the shipping clamps.

4 Disconnect the cables from the top board.

5 Remove the black safety covers from the top board.

6 Remove the 2 hex standoffs and 4 screws that hold the top board to the top plate.

7 Gently pry the 9-pin connector off the feedthrough in the top plate.

8 Lift off the top board.

9 Reverse steps 1 through 8 to install a new top board.

10 Adjust the RF coils.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 239 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 240: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

240

4 Maintaining the MSD

To adjust the RF coils

To adjust the RF coils

Materials needed:

Tuning wand (8710-0933)

Special considerations

• Take full anti-static precautions.

• Use only the non-metallic tuning wand to adjust the RF coils.

• Adjust the coils alternately, keeping the screws at equal extensions from the coils.

Steps

1 Make sure the MSD is at thermal equilibrium.

2 Remove the upper MSD cover.

3 Call up the Set RFPA program in your data system.

4 Enter an amu value of 100 (if the instrument is far out of adjustment, you may have to begin at 10).

5 Adjust the RF coils to minimize the voltage displayed by the data system.

6 When the voltage is minimized, press the STOP key. The minimum voltage should be between 90 and 125 mV.

7 Repeat steps 3 through 6 for 650 amu. The minimum voltage should be between 500 and 800 mV.

8 Exit the Set RFPA program.

9 Reinstall the upper MSD cover.

10 Retune the MSD.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 240 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 241: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To replace the main board

241

To replace the main board

Materials needed:

Hex nut driver, 1/4-inch (8720-0002)Screwdriver, TORX T-15 (8710-1622)Main board (05971-60018)

Special considerations

• Take full anti-static precautions.

Steps

1 Vent the MSD and slide it away from the GC.

2 Remove the upper and lower MSD covers.

3 Remove the safety cover from over the main board.

4 Disconnect the cables from the main board (4 on the front of the board, 3 on the back).

5 Remove the 4 standoffs and 4 screws that hold the main board to the electronics panel.

6 Slide the main board to the right to disconnect it from the HP-IB/MS control card.

7 Remove the main board.

8 Reverse steps 1 through 7 to install a new main board.

9 Retune the MSD.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 241 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 242: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

242

4 Maintaining the MSD

To replace the HP-IB/MS control card

To replace the HP-IB/MS control card

Materials needed:

Hex nut driver, 1/4-inch (8720-0002)Screwdriver, TORX T-15 (8710-1622)HP-IB/MS control card (05990-69406)

Special considerations

• Take full anti-static precautions.

• Make sure the address switch settings on the new HP-IB/MS control card match the ad-dress switch settings on the old card.

Steps

1 Vent the MSD.

2 Remove the upper and lower MSD covers.

3 Remove the safety covers from over the main board and HP-IB/MS control card.

4 Disconnect the cables from the HP-IB/MS control card.

5 Disconnect the accessory connector cable from the main board.

6 Remove the 6 screws and 1 standoff that hold the HP-IB/MS control card to the electronics panel.

7 Slide the HP-IB/MS control card to the left to disconnect it from the main board.

8 Remove the HP-IB/MS control card.

9 Reverse steps 1 through 8 to install a new HP-IB/MS control card.

10 Retune the MSD.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 242 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 243: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To remove the electronics panel

243

To remove the electronics panel

Materials needed:

Hex nut driver, 1/4-inch (8720-0002)Screwdriver, TORX T-15 (8710-1622)

Special considerations

• Take full anti-static precautions.

Steps

1 Vent the MSD and slide it away from the GC.

2 Remove the upper and lower MSD covers.

3 Disconnect the ribbon, filament, and signal cables from the main board.

4 Disconnect the ground wire that connects the ground terminal on the electronics panel to the base of the instrument.

5 Disconnect the calibration valve cable from the back of the main board (near the triode gauge).

6 Remove the three standoffs that hold the electronics panel to the instrument frame.

7 Tilt the top of the electronics panel toward you.

8 Reach behind the electronics panel and disconnect the diffusion pump, fan, and foreline vacuum gauge cables from the power distribution board.

9 Lift the electronics panel out of the MSD.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 243 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 244: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

244

4 Maintaining the MSD

To reinstall the electronics panel

To reinstall the electronics panel

Materials needed:

Hex nut driver, 1/4-inch (8720-0002)Screwdriver, TORX T-15 (8710-1622)

Special considerations

• Take full anti-static precautions.

Steps

1 Place the electronics panel a few inches from its proper position.

2 Reconnect the diffusion pump, fan, and foreline vacuum gauge cables to the power distribution board.

3 Put the tabs on the bottom of the electronics panel into the slots in the base of the instrument.

4 Tilt the electronics panel up until the rear grommet seats on the vacuum manifold.

5 Reinstall the rear (left) standoff.

6 Reinstall the middle standoff.

7 Reinstall the front (right) standoff.

8 Reconnect the ground wire to ground terminal on the base of the instrument.

9 Reconnect the ribbon, filament, and signal cables to the main board.

10 Reconnect the calibration valve cable to the back of the main board.

11 Reinstall the upper and lower MSD covers.

12 Start up and pump down the MSD.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 244 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 245: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To replace the power distribution board

245

To replace the power distribution board

Materials needed:

Hex nut driver, 1/4-inch (8720-0002)Power distribution board (05971-60003)Screwdriver, TORX T-15 (8710-1622)

Special considerations

• Take full anti-static precautions.

• If your instrument operates on 220/240 V ac power, you must replace the two standard 4-amp diffusion pump fuses with 2-amp fuses (2110-0002).

Steps

1 Vent the MSD.

2 Remove the upper and lower MSD covers.

3 Remove the electronics panel from the MSD.

4 Remove the safety cover from over the HP-IB/MS control card

5 Disconnect the white 5-pin connector located just below the two round diffusion pump fuse holders.

6 Disconnect the 5-pin and 12-pin connectors from the power distribution board.

7 Remove the 5 screws that hold the power distribution board to the electronics panel. Save the screws.

8 Remove the power distribution board.

9 Check the diffusion pump fuses in the new power distribution board. Make sure they are appropriate for the voltage range of your MSD.

10 Reverse steps 1 through 8 to install a new power distribution board.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 245 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 246: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

246

4 Maintaining the MSD

To replace the power supply fuse

To replace the power supply fuse

The fuse on the power supply is not replaceable. If this fuse fails, it indicates an event or power supply condition so serious that the entire power supply should be replaced.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 246 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 247: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

4 Maintaining the MSD

To replace the power supply

247

To replace the power supply

Materials needed:

Hex nut driver, 1/4-inch (8720-0002)Screwdriver

Pozidriv #2 (8710-0900)TORX T-15 (8710-1622)

Power supply board (0950-2552)

Special considerations

• Take full anti-static precautions.

• The power supply works for both 110/120 and 220/240 V ac power.

Steps

1 Vent the MSD.

2 Remove the upper and lower MSD covers and safety covers from over the HP-IB/MS control card and the main board.

3 Remove the electronics panel from the MSD.

4 Remove the main board.

5 Remove the HP-IB/MS control card.

6 Disconnect the power distribution board cable (3 wires) from the power supply.

7 Disconnect the main board cable (9 wires) from the power supply.

8 Remove the power supply (the 4 screws are on the main-board side of the electronics panel).

9 Reverse steps 1 through 8 to install the new power supply.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 247 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 248: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

248

4 Maintaining the MSD

To replace the diffusion pump fuses

To replace the diffusion pump fuses

Materials needed:

Fuse2-amp (2110-0002)4-amp (2110-0055)

Hex nut driver, 1/4-inch (8720-0002)Screwdriver

flat-bladed (8710-1029)TORX T-15 (8710-1622)

Special considerations

• Take full anti-static precautions.

• Make sure to use fuses of proper rating for the voltage on which your MSD is operating.

110/120 V ac, 4-amp (2110-0055)220/240 V ac, 2-amp (2110-0002)

Steps

1 Vent the MSD.

2 Remove the upper and lower MSD covers.

3 Remove the safety cover from over the HP-IB/MS control card.

4 Locate the round diffusion pump fuse holders to the left of the HP-IB/MS control card.

5 Remove the fuses and inspect them. If necessary replace the fuses.

6 Reinstall the safety cover.

7 Reinstall the upper and lower MSD covers.

8 Start up and pump down the MSD.

iq72.bk : chapter4 Page 248 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 249: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

5

Vacuum System

This chapter describes components of the vacuum system in the MSD

Vacuum manifold, 252Top plate, 253Vacuum seals, 254Foreline pump and trap, 256Foreline gauge, 258Diffusion pump and fan, 260Calibration valve, 264Triode gauge tube, 266Gauge controller, 268

iq72.bk : chapter5 Page 249 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 250: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

250

Vacuum System

The vacuum system is essential to MSD operation

The vacuum system creates the high vacuum (low pressure) required for the MSD to operate. Without this vacuum, the molecular mean free path is too short. Ions cannot travel from the ion source through the mass filter to the electron multiplier (detector) without colliding with other molecules.

Many components make up the vacuum system

The major components of the vacuum system are:

• Vacuum manifold

• Vacuum seals

• Top plate

• Foreline pump and trap

• Foreline gauge

• Diffusion pump and fan

• Calibration valve

• Triode gauge tube

• Gauge controller (optional)

Each of these is discussed in more detail in the following material.

Vacuum system control is mostly automated

Most vacuum system operation is automated and done through the data system. Monitoring of the vacuum system is done through the data system or the optional gauge controller.

iq72.bk : chapter5 Page 250 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 251: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

5 Vacuum System

251

Diffusion pump

Top plate

Foreline pump

Triode gauge tube

Foreline trap

Calibration valve

Vacuum manifold

Fan

Foreline gauge (behind diffusion pump)

iq72.bk : chapter5 Page 251 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 252: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

252

5 Vacuum System

Vacuum manifold

Vacuum manifold

The vacuum manifold is the housing for the analyzer which must operate in a vacuum. The vacuum manifold is machined from a solid block of aluminum alloy. The large opening in the top of the vacuum manifold is covered by the top plate. An O-ring provides a seal between the manifold and the top plate.

Fittings on the vacuum manifold provide attachment points for the triode gauge tube, calibration valve, GC interface, and diffusion pump.

The diffusion pump attaches to a large flange on the vacuum manifold. Above the diffusion pump flange is an internal baffle which helps prevent pump-fluid vapor from migrating toward the sensitive analyzer elements. A return path is provided for any fluid that condenses on the baffle.

Baffle

Groove for manifold O-ring

KF50 flange for diffusion pump

KF25 flange for GC interface

Fitting for triode gauge tube

Fitting for calibration valve (underneath manifold)

Cover (do not remove)

iq72.bk : chapter5 Page 252 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 253: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

5 Vacuum System

Top plate

253

Top plate

The top plate is a flat, stainless steel plate. It covers the large opening in the top of the vacuum manifold. The analyzer assembly is suspended from the top plate inside the vacuum manifold. Several electrical feedthroughs are built into the top plate. Wires connect the feedthroughs to analyzer components. The top board is mounted on the atmospheric side of the top plate. The proximity of the top board to the analyzer provides cleaner signals. Shipping clamps are located on the vacuum manifold at each end of the top plate.

C A U T I O N Tighten the shipping clamps only for shipping or storage. If the shipping clamps are tight during normal operation it can cause air leaks.

Top plate

Manifold O-ring

Shipping clamp

Vacuum manifold

Shipping clamp

iq72.bk : chapter5 Page 253 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 254: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

254

5 Vacuum System

Vacuum seals

Vacuum seals

Several types of seals are used to prevent air leaks into the vacuum manifold.

Manifold O-ring

The manifold O-ring is an elastomer O-ring. It sits in a groove around the opening on top of the vacuum manifold. The top plate rests on the manifold O-ring. Keep the manifold O-ring free of dust and particles. Avoid nicking or scratching it. Avoid nicking or scratching the vacuum manifold and top plate surfaces that contact the O-ring. The manifold O-ring can be replaced.

KF seals

The seals for the diffusion pump, GC interface, foreline vacuum gauge assembly, and foreline trap are known as KF seals. There are two types of KF seals. One type, the O-ring assembly, consists of an elastomer O-ring and a metal or plastic centering (positioning) ring inside the O-ring. The other type, called a coseal, has a seal that is almost square in cross-section and a centering ring around the outside of the seal. Most KF seals are vented to prevent air from being trapped between the seal and the centering ring.

When KF flanges are clamped together, the seal is compressed between the flange surfaces. KF clamps require no tools for assembly or disassembly.

Calibration valve O-rings

The calibration valve assembly threads onto a fitting which threads into the vacuum manifold. Small O-rings on each end of the fitting provide vacuum seals.

Triode gauge seal

The vacuum seal for the triode gauge tube consists of a threaded fitting on the vacuum manifold, a threaded collar, and an O-ring. The O-ring is located inside the collar. The stem of the triode gauge tube fits inside the collar. When the collar is tightened, the O-ring is compressed and seals around the stem of the tube.

iq72.bk : chapter5 Page 254 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 255: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

5 Vacuum System

Vacuum seals

255

Top plate

Manifold O-ring

Vacuum manifold

O-ring assembly

KF flange(clamp not shown)

KF flange(clamp not shown)

Coseal

Collar

O-ring

Vacuum manifold

Triode gauge tube

iq72.bk : chapter5 Page 255 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 256: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

256

5 Vacuum System

Foreline pump and trap

Foreline pump and trap

The foreline pump lowers the pressure in the vacuum manifold so the diffusion pump can be switched on. Once the diffusion pump is on, the foreline pump continues to pump away the material exiting the diffusion pump.

The foreline pump is a mechanical, rotary-vane pump. It has a built-in anti-suckback valve. The inlet of the foreline pump is equipped with a trap. The trap is filled with adsorbent pellets (molecular sieve). The trap helps prevent vapor from the foreline pump fluid from being drawn up into the foreline gauge, diffusion pump, and vacuum manifold.

The foreline pump can be located anywhere near the MSD, within reach of the hose that connects the pump to the MSD. Typically, the foreline pump sits on the bench behind the MSD or on the floor below the MSD.

The exhaust from the foreline pump may contain traces of solvents and samples. Some of these may be toxic. The exhaust must be vented outside or to a fume hood.

The ballast control on top of the pump controls the amount of air (ballast) allowed into the pump. Increasing the ballast increases the volume of material the pump can transport but decreases the ultimate vacuum the pump can achieve. For use with the MSD, ultimate vacuum is more important than pumping volume. The ballast control should always be set to the 0 position.

The mode switch on the side of the pump controls the amount of pump fluid sent to the high-vacuum stage of the pump. Increasing the pump fluid to this stage increases the volume of material the pump can transport but decreases the ultimate vacuum the pump can achieve. For use with the MSD, ultimate vacuum is more important than pumping volume. The mode control should always be turned fully clockwise (to the position with the small droplets).

C A U T I O N Do not place the foreline pump near any equipment that is sensitive to vibration.

W A R N I N G The exhaust from the foreline pump may contain traces of toxic chemicals from your analyses. Always vent the pump exhaust outside or to a fume hood.

iq72.bk : chapter5 Page 256 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 257: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

5 Vacuum System

Foreline pump and trap

257

A window in the front of the foreline pump shows the level of the foreline pump fluid. There are two sets of marks next to the window. The level of the pump fluid should never be above the upper marks or below the lower marks. If the level of pump fluid is near the lower marks, add foreline pump fluid.

See Also To check and add foreline pump fluid, page 168

Foreline hose(from diffusion pump outlet)

Foreline trap

Exhaust outlet (route exhaust outside of laboratory)

Mode switch

Ballast control

Power (on/off) switch

Fluid level window

Drain plug

Fill cap

iq72.bk : chapter5 Page 257 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 258: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

258

5 Vacuum System

Foreline gauge

Foreline gauge

The foreline gauge monitors the pressure (vacuum) at the exit of the diffusion pump. The primary function of the foreline gauge is diffusion pump control. When the foreline pump has reduced the pressure in the vacuum manifold to below 300 mTorr (0.3 Torr), the diffusion pump is automatically switched on. If the foreline pressure rises above 400 mTorr (0.4 Torr), the power distribution board switches off the diffusion pump heater and the analyzer electronics.

The foreline pressure can be monitored from your data system.

The MSD also includes a triode gauge tube. With the optional gauge controller, the triode gauge can measure the high vacuum in the vacuum manifold.

See Also To monitor the foreline pressure, page 42

Gauge controller, page 268

iq72.bk : chapter5 Page 258 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 259: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

5 Vacuum System

Foreline gauge

259

Hose to foreline pump

Foreline gauge fitting

Foreline gauge

Connector

Diffusion pump exit

iq72.bk : chapter5 Page 259 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 260: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

260

5 Vacuum System

Diffusion pump and fan

Diffusion pump and fan

The diffusion pump creates the low pressure (high vacuum) required for correct analyzer operation. The diffusion pump in the MSD is an air-cooled vapor diffusion pump. It is clamped to the large KF50 flange at the rear of the vacuum manifold.

The diffusion pump has a cylindrical body surrounded by fins to held dissipate heat. Its inlet is open to the interior of the vacuum manifold. A structure called the stack is located at the center of the pump body. An electric heater is located at the bottom of the stack.

The diffusion pump transports gas by momentum transfer. The heater boils a special fluid (a synthetic oil) inside the stack. As the vapor pressure increases, the fluid vapor is forced out through jets in the stack. These jets are angled downward. The vapor forced out of these jets strikes the gas molecules that are present. This forces the gas molecules down toward the outlet near the bottom of the pump. Another jet in the stack points directly at the outlet and forces the gas molecules out. The fluid falls back to the bottom of the pump. Some fluid also condenses on the sides of the pump and runs down to the bottom. The fluid is boiled again and is thus reused continuously.

The foreline pump is connected by a hose to the outlet of the diffusion pump. It removes the gas molecules that reach the outlet.

The diffusion pump is turned on automatically as soon as the foreline pump lowers the pressure in the vacuum manifold below approximately 300 mTorr (0.3 Torr). The diffusion pump typically maintains an indicated pressure below 1.4 × 10-4 Torr for GC carrier gas flows up to 2 ml/minute. High vacuum (manifold) pressure can only be measured if your MSD is equipped with the optional gauge controller.

See Also Gauge controller, page 268

iq72.bk : chapter5 Page 260 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 261: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

5 Vacuum System

Diffusion pump and fan

261

Vapor jet

Vacuum manifold

Outlet (to foreline pump)

Outlet jet

Pump fluid vapor rises

Pump fluid

Vapor jet

Heater

Stack components

iq72.bk : chapter5 Page 261 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 262: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

262

5 Vacuum System

Diffusion pump and fan

The small size of the diffusion pump allows it to heat up and cool down quickly. This simplifies pumpdown and venting. From initial power-on, the system can pump down to operating pressure in approximately 15 minutes. If the power fails, the diffusion pump fluid stops boiling before the vacuum manifold pressure begins to rise significantly. This helps prevent backstreaming of diffusion pump fluid into the vacuum manifold. Your data system has pumpdown and venting programs to guide you through these procedures. Follow their instructions carefully.

See Also To pump down the MSD, page 40

To vent the MSD, page 58

A fan is located between the diffusion pump and the back panel of the MSD. The fan draws air through the MSD and blows it over the pump.

There are two thermal switches on the diffusion pump. The too hot switch is located on the cooling fins of the pump. If the pump is too hot, the diffusion pump and analyzer electronics are automatically switched off. They will not switch on again until you switch the power switch off and then on.

The too cold switch is located below the cooling fins on the diffusion pump. This switch keeps the analyzer off until the diffusion pump reaches its normal operating temperature.

iq72.bk : chapter5 Page 262 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 263: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

5 Vacuum System

Diffusion pump and fan

263

Fan

Too hot switch

Too cold switch

Diffusion pump

iq72.bk : chapter5 Page 263 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 264: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

264

5 Vacuum System

Calibration valve

Calibration valve

The calibration valve is an electromechanical valve with a vial for tuning compounds. The calibration valve is threaded into a hole in the bottom of the vacuum manifold. It is controlled from the data system.

When the calibration valve is opened, tuning compound in the vial diffuses into the vacuum manifold. The valve has a restrictor that controls the entry of the tuning compound into the vacuum manifold.

Perfluorotributylamine (PFTBA) is the most commonly used tuning compound. It is required for automatic tuning of the MSD. Other compounds can be used for manual tuning. The tuning compound is usually a liquid but can be a volatile or semi-volatile solid.

iq72.bk : chapter5 Page 264 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 265: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

5 Vacuum System

Calibration valve

265

Calibration valve assembly

Vial

Calibration valve fitting

Vacuum manifold

iq72.bk : chapter5 Page 265 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 266: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

266

5 Vacuum System

Triode gauge tube

Triode gauge tube

A triode gauge tube is connected to the vacuum manifold. If your MSD is equipped with the optional HP 59864A Gauge Controller, the triode gauge can be used to measure the pressure (high vacuum) in the vacuum manifold. The triode gauge will not operate at pressures above 8 × 10-3 Torr. The triode gauge cannot be used without the gauge controller.

The triode gauge relies on the ionization of gas molecules to establish a pressure-dependent current flow. In the triode gauge, electrical current is passed through a filament called the cathode. This heats the filament causing it to emit electrons. The gauge controller regulates the current to maintain a constant rate of electron emission. The electrons accelerate from the filament toward a surrounding grid which is held at a higher potential (+150 V dc).

The emitted electrons collide with gas molecules in the tube. These collisions knock electrons off of the gas molecules, forming positive ions. The positive ions are driven to a wire mesh collector which is at ground potential. At the collector, the positive ions reacquire missing electrons and become neutral again. This generates a current in the collector. The current is measured by the gauge controller.

The number of ions formed is a function of the number of gas molecules present. Pressure is also a function of the number of gas molecules present. Therefore, pressure can be calculated based on the current applied to the filament (cathode) and the current measured in the collector. Since one end of the triode gauge tube is open to the vacuum manifold, the pressure in the triode gauge is essentially the same as the pressure in the vacuum manifold.

Unlike some other pressure gauges that work by ionization, the triode gauge does not require degassing to remove accumulated ions from the surfaces in the gauge.

W A R N I N G Parts of the triode gauge tube operate at approximately 180 V dc. Turn off the triode gauge before working near it.

iq72.bk : chapter5 Page 266 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 267: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

5 Vacuum System

Triode gauge tube

267

Filament voltage and emission current regulated by gauge controller

Grid voltage supplied by gauge controller

Filament voltage and emission current regulated by gauge controller

Collector (ion) current measured by gauge controller

Grid

Filament (cathode)

Collector

Open to vacuum manifold

iq72.bk : chapter5 Page 267 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 268: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

268

5 Vacuum System

Gauge controller

Gauge controller

Each MSD is equipped with a triode gauge tube. The optional HP 59864A Gauge Controller allows you to use the triode gauge to monitor the pressure in the MSD vacuum manifold. This can aid in everyday operation and in troubleshooting.

Ion gauge tube HP 5972A MSDs with serial numbers below 3501A00000 were equipped with an ion gauge tube. An ion gauge tube is functionally similar to, but physically different from, a triode gauge tube. The HP 59864A Gauge Controller cannot be used with an ion gauge tube. If your MSD is equipped with an ion gauge tube, use an HP 59822B Gauge Controller or replace the ion gauge tube with a triode gauge tube.

The HP 59864A Gauge Controller includes the gauge controller, a 2-meter power cord, and a cable for connecting the gauge controller to the triode gauge. The power cord is supplied with a connector appropriate for the country from which the order was placed. The gauge controller can operate on all voltages between 100 and 240 V ac (nominal). It can operate at ac frequencies of 50 to 60 hertz. The fuse in the gauge controller is appropriate for all allowed voltages.

The gauge controller regulates the current to the filament of the triode gauge tube, ensuring a constant emission of electrons from the filament. It also measures the ion current in the collector. From these data, the gauge controller calculates and displays the pressure present in the vacuum manifold. The vacuum manifold pressure (in Torr) is displayed on the front panel of the controller.

The gauge controller has no degas circuit because the triode gauge tube does not require degassing.

The gauge controller is calibrated for nitrogen (N2). The dominant gas in the MSD is the carrier gas (usually helium). In these cases, the pressure reading on the gauge controller will not be absolutely accurate. It is an indicated pressure, not an absolute pressure. If the gauge controller is calibrated for nitrogen, and is measuring helium, the indicated pressure will be approximately a factor of 6 lower than the absolute pressure (for example, an indicated pressure of 2.0 × 10-5 versus an absolute pressure of 1.2 × 10-4). The distinction between indicated and absolute pressure is generally not important for day-to-day operation of the MSD. Of greater concern are changes in pressure from hour to hour or day to day. These changes can indicate impending problems and the need for maintenance.

iq72.bk : chapter5 Page 268 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 269: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

5 Vacuum System

Gauge controller

269

All the pressures listed in this manual are indicated pressures for helium carrier gas. The gauge controller setpoints are also indicated pressures.

See Also To monitor vacuum manifold pressure, page 46

Power cord

Power switch

Cable to triode gauge

Fuse

Ground point

Pressure display

Power indicator

Gauge (on/off) switch

iq72.bk : chapter5 Page 269 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 270: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

270

iq72.bk : chapter5 Page 270 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 271: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

6

GC Interface

This chapter describes the function of the GC interface

GC interface, 272

iq72.bk : chapter6 Page 271 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 272: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

272

GC interface

The GC interface provides a heated sample path from the GC oven to the ion source in the MSD. It is mounted on the KF25 flange on the right side of the vacuum manifold. One end of the GC interface passes through the side of the gas chromatograph and protrudes into the GC oven. The other end of the GC interface fits into a socket on the ion source.

The GC interface is heated by an electric cartridge heater. On the HP 5972A MSD, the heater is powered by 110 V ac electricity from either the detector B (Det B) heated zone or the auxiliary (Aux) heated zone of an HP 5890 GC. On the HP 6890 Series MSD, the heater is powered by 40 V dc electricity from auxiliary heated zone 2 (Aux 2) of the HP 6890 Series GC.

The GC interface temperature can be set from the data system. It can also be set from the keypad of the gas chromatograph. A sensor (thermocouple) in the GC interface monitors the temperature. The bellows on the interface provides a high-thermal-impedance path, so that the vacuum manifold and manifold O-ring stay relatively cool.

The GC interface should be operated in the 250° – 320°C range. Subject to that restriction, the GC interface temperature should be slightly higher than the maximum GC oven temperature.

A fused-silica transfer line runs through the center of the GC interface. The GC eluent flows through the transfer line. If the GC column is a narrow-bore (0.20 mm id) or wide-bore (0.32 mm id) capillary column, the last 20 cm of the column can be inserted directly into the GC interface to serve as the transfer line (subject to flow restrictions). If a megabore or packed column is installed in the GC, an effluent splitter or jet separator must be used to reduce the column flow into the MSD. A separate piece of capillary column is then installed as the transfer line.

See Also Radiator on page 278 for more information about indirect heating of analyzer components by the GC interface.

Installing GC Columns on page 17

iq72.bk : chapter6 Page 272 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 273: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

6 GC Interface

273

GC end of GC interface

Capillary column passage

Heater sleeve

Interface socket

Ion source

Coseal

Bellows

Heater wire

Sensor (thermocouple) wire

Ground wire (not present on HP 6890 Series MSD)

Vacuum manifold wall

iq72.bk : chapter6 Page 273 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 274: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

274

iq72.bk : chapter6 Page 274 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 275: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

7

Analyzer

This chapter describes the analyzer

Radiator, 278Ion source, 280Mass filter, 284Electron multiplier, 287

iq72.bk : chapter7 Page 275 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 276: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

276

Analyzer

The analyzer is the heart of the MSD

The analyzer ionizes the sample, filters the ions, and detects them. The sample components exiting the GC column flow into the ion source. In the ion source, the sample molecules are ionized and fragmented. The resulting ions are expelled from the ion source into the quadrupole mass filter. The mass filter allows selected ions to pass through the filter and strike the electron multiplier at the exit of the filter. The electron multiplier generates a signal proportional to the number of ions striking it. The analyzer is suspended from the top plate inside the vacuum manifold.

The analyzer has four basic components

The analyzer consists of the following components:

• Radiator

• Ion source

• Mass filter

• Electron multiplier

Each of these is discussed in the following material.

iq72.bk : chapter7 Page 276 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 277: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

7 Analyzer

277

Temperature sensor

Electron multiplier

Top plate

Top board(under covers)

Interface socket

Radiator

Ion source(inside radiator)

Ion source feedthrough

Mass filter(inside radiator)

iq72.bk : chapter7 Page 277 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 278: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

278

7 Analyzer

Radiator

Radiator

The ion source and quadrupole mass filter are housed in a square aluminum tube called the radiator. The radiator is conductively heated by the GC interface. The radiator geometry determines the relative heating of the analyzer components. Because the analyzer is heated indirectly, it responds slowly to changes in the GC interface temperature. After pumpdown, it takes at least 4 hours for the analyzer to reach thermal equilibrium. Data acquired sooner may not be reproducible.

To establish proper analyzer temperature, the GC interface assembly should be operated in the 250° to 320°C range. A typical GC interface temperature is 280°C. Corresponding temperatures for the various parts of the analyzer are approximately:

• Radiator near the ion source (MS temperature) 175°C

• Ion source 195°C

• Mass filter 155°C

• Electron multiplier 110°C

The MSD has two temperature sensors. One sensor is in the GC interface. Its temperature can be read from the data system or from the GC. If you are using an HP 5890 GC, the GC interface temperature will be called the Det B temperature or the Aux temperature depending on which heated zone controls the GC interface. If you are using an HP 6890 Series GC, the GC interface temperature will be called the Auxiliary 2 (thermal aux 2) temperature. The other sensor is in the radiator near the ion source. Its temperature can be read only from the data system. In the MS ChemStation software it is called the MS temperature.

The top figure on the opposite page is a graph of MS temperature as a function of GC interface temperature. The relationship is shown as a band rather than a line because MS temperature can vary slightly from instrument to instrument.

The bottom figure on the opposite page is a graph of ion source temperature, quadrupole mass filter temperature, and electron multiplier temperature as a function of GC interface temperature. All temperature curves shown are approximations that can vary slightly from instrument to instrument.

iq72.bk : chapter7 Page 278 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 279: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

7 Analyzer

Radiator

279

iq72.bk : chapter7 Page 279 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 280: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

280

7 Analyzer

Ion source

Ion source

The ion source is an electron-ionization ion source. It has a cylindrical geometry, which ensures proper concentric alignment of the ion source elements. The sample enters the ion source from the GC interface. Electrons emitted by one of the filaments enter the ion source volume, which is at ground potential. A small permanent magnet focuses the electron beam. The electrons ionize and fragment the sample molecules. Positive and negative ions are generated. Positive ions are repelled from the ion source volume. They pass through several electrostatic lenses. These lenses concentrate the ions into a tight beam.

Ion source body

The ion source body is a cylinder. It holds the other parts of the ion source. With the repeller and the drawout plate, it forms the ion source volume. The ion source volume is the space where the ions are formed. The source body is slotted. This makes it easier for the vacuum system to pump away carrier gas and un-ionized sample molecules or fragments.

Filaments

Two filaments are located on opposite sides of the outside of the ion source. The filaments emit electrons that ionize the sample molecules. In addition to the ac power that heats them, each filament carries a -70 V dc bias voltage.

Only one filament can be active at a time. The active filament can be chosen through the data system. Turning the active filament off when it is not in use prolongs filament life. Turning the active filament off for large solvent peaks can also prevent filament damage. The filament is shut off automatically if there is a general instrument shutdown.

There are two parameters that affect the filaments: filament emission and filament selection.

Filament emission

The filament emission current is variable but typically set at 50 µA. The filament emission parameter allows you to specify the emission current.

iq72.bk : chapter7 Page 280 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 281: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

7 Analyzer

Ion source

281

Repeller

Entrance lens

Filament (1 of 2)

Drawout plate

Drawout cylinder

Lens insulator

Ion focus lens

Ion source body

Set screw

Inlet

Ion source volume

iq72.bk : chapter7 Page 281 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 282: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

282

7 Analyzer

Ion source

Filament selection

The filament selection parameter allows you to select which filament in the ion source is active.

• Filament 1 is also referred to as filament B, and the up filament.

• Filament 2 is also referred to as filament A, and the down filament.

Frequently, one filament will give better performance than the other. The better of the two filaments is noted on the final-test sheet accompanying your MSD. No MSD is shipped until it passes all tests using each filament.

After replacing a filament, you must determine which filament gives better performance. To do this, run two autotunes, one with each filament. Use the filament that gives the best results.

Repeller

The repeller forms one wall of the ion source volume. A positive charge on the repeller pushes positively-charged fragments and parent ions out of the source through a series of lenses. The repeller voltage is also known as the ion energy, although the ions only receive a fraction of the repeller energy.

The repeller voltage can be varied from 0 to +42.8 V dc. Some tune programs use a fixed repeller voltage. Others ramp the repeller voltage to find the optimum setting.

• A too low repeller voltage results in poor sensitivity and poor high mass response

• A too high repeller voltage results in a precursor (poor mass filtering) and poor low mass resolution

Drawout plate and cylinder

The drawout plate forms another wall of the ion source volume. The drawout cylinder is slotted. The slots correspond to slots in the source body. These allow carrier gas and un-ionized sample molecules or fragments to be pulled away by the vacuum system. The drawout plate and drawout cylinder are both at ground potential. The ion beam passes through the hole in the drawout plate.

iq72.bk : chapter7 Page 282 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 283: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

7 Analyzer

Ion source

283

Ion focus

The voltage on the ion focus lens can be varied from 0 to -127 V dc. A typical voltage is between -60 and -100 V dc. In general:

• Increasing the ion focus voltage improves sensitivity at lower masses.

• Decreasing the ion focus voltage improves sensitivity at higher masses.

• Poor ion focus adjustment results in poor high mass response.

Entrance lens

The entrance lens is located at the entrance to the quadrupole mass filter. This lens minimizes the fringing fields of the quadrupole which discriminate against high-mass ions. Two voltages are applied to the entrance lens. One voltage is fixed. The other voltage varies according to the ion mass currently being passed through the mass filter. In addition, +4.4 V dc is permanently applied to the entrance lens.

Entrance lens gain

Entrance lens gain controls the variable voltage applied to the entrance lens. It determines how many volts are applied for each amu. It can be varied from 0 to -128 mV/amu. A typical range is -30 to -60 mV/amu.

Entrance lens offset

The entrance lens offset controls the fixed voltage applied to the entrance lens. It can be varied from 0 to -64 V dc. Increasing the entrance lens offset generally increases the abundance of ions at low masses without substantially decreasing the abundance of high mass ions.

iq72.bk : chapter7 Page 283 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 284: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

284

7 Analyzer

Mass filter

Mass filter

The mass filter separates ions according to their mass-to-charge ratio (m/z). At a given time, it only ions of a selected mass-to-charge ratio can pass through the filter to the detector.

The mass filter is a fused-silica tube with a hyperbolic geometry. The four hyperbolic segments are coated on the inside with a conductive material. Opposing segments are connected together.

A combined direct current (dc) and radio frequency (RF) signal is applied to the two pairs of segments. The magnitude of the RF voltage determines the mass-to-charge ratio of the ions that pass through the mass filter and reach the detector. The ratio of dc-to-RF voltage determines the resolution (widths of the mass peaks). There are several parameters that control the dc and RF voltages:

• Dc polarity

• Amu gain

• Amu offset

• 219 width

iq72.bk : chapter7 Page 284 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 285: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

7 Analyzer

Mass filter

285

Dc polarity

The dc polarity parameter selects the orientation of the direct current applied to the quadrupole mass filter. The value can be positive or negative. The dc polarity that works best for your MSD is determined at the factory. It is listed on the final test sheet accompanying your MSD. It is also listed on a label on the cover over the RF coils. This cover can be viewed by removing the upper MSD cover.

AMU gain

AMU gain affects the ratio of dc voltage to RF frequency on the mass filter. This controls the widths of the mass peaks.

• A higher gain yields narrower peaks.

• Amu gain affects peaks at high masses more than peaks at low masses.

AMU offset

AMU offset also affects the ratio of dc voltage to RF frequency on the mass filter.

• A higher offset yields narrower peaks.

• Amu offset generally affects peak widths equally at all masses

219 width

m/z 219 is a prominent mass in PFTBA. This parameter makes small corrections to the m/z 219 peak width. The correction is electronic; it does not alter the voltages applied to the mass filter. Amu gain and amu offset must be readjusted after the 219 width is changed. If you are tuning with a compound other than PFTBA, there may not be an ion at m/z 219. In that case, set the 219 width to the last value found for it by autotune or set it to 0.

iq72.bk : chapter7 Page 285 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 286: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

286

7 Analyzer

Mass filter

The mass filter fits accurately over the end of the entrance lens, so that the entrance lens centers the quadrupole. The exit end of the quadrupole is held in place by a ceramic insulator.

The mass filter requires no periodic maintenance. If maintenance is performed around the mass filter, care should be taken; the mass filter can be damaged by water or solvents with free chloride. Acetone, hexane, and freon can be used safely around the mass filter.

C A U T I O N Never use water or solvents with free chloride anywhere near the mass filter. These can ruin the mass filter.

C A U T I O N Never change the physical orientation of the quadrupole mass filter.

iq72.bk : chapter7 Page 286 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 287: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

7 Analyzer

Electron multiplier

287

Electron multiplier

The electron multiplier is located at the exit end of the quadrupole mass filter. It receives the ions that have passed through the mass filter. The electron multiplier generates an electronic signal proportional to the number of ions striking it. The electron multiplier has two main components:

• X-ray lens

• Electron multiplier horn

Signal lead

X-ray lens

Electron multiplier horn

X-ray lead

High-voltage lead

iq72.bk : chapter7 Page 287 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 288: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

288

7 Analyzer

Electron multiplier

X-ray lens

The x-ray lens directs ions into the electron multiplier horn. The horn is located off-axis from the center of the quadrupole mass filter to minimize signals due to photons, hot neutrals, and electrons coming from the ion source. The optimumx-ray voltage is affected by the electron multiplier voltage. For that reason, the electron multiplier voltage is usually set first. Then, the x-ray voltage is ramped to determine the setting that provides the greatest abundance.

Electron multiplier horn

The electron multiplier horn usually carries a high negative potential (voltage) which attracts the positive sample ions. Ions strike the interior of the horn and liberate secondary electrons. These cascade through the horn, liberating more electrons as they go. A shielded cable carries the electron multiplier output to a logarithmic amplifier on the main board. The overall gain of the system is adjusted to about 105.

The voltage applied to the electron multiplier horn determines the gain. The voltage is adjustable from 0 to -3000 V dc. The electron multiplier voltage found in autotune should be used as a baseline for the electron multiplier voltage setting.

• To increase sensitivity, increase the electron multiplier voltage.

• For concentrated samples where less sensitivity is needed, decrease the electron multiplier voltage.

The voltage required by the electron multiplier generally increases over time. If the electron multiplier voltage must always be set at or near -3000 V dc to achieve adequate sensitivity, it may need to be replaced.

See Also Troubleshooting the MSD on page 63 for more information about symptoms that may indicate electron multiplier problems.

iq72.bk : chapter7 Page 288 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 289: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

8

Electronics

This chapter describes how the MSD electronics work

Top board, 292Main board, 299HP-IB/MS control card, 308Power supply, 312Power distribution board, 312Connectors and controls, 314Status display, 316Parallel/remote board & cable (HP 5890 GC only), 318

iq72.bk : chapter8 Page 289 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 290: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

290

Electronics

The following assemblies make up the MSD electronics:

• Top board

• Main board

• HP-IB/MS control card

• Power distribution board

• Power supply

• Connectors and controls

• Status display

• Parallel/remote board

Each is discussed in this chapter. Except for the Connectors and controls and Status display sections, most of this material is not essential for day-to-day operation of the MSD. It may be of interest to persons responsible for servicing the MSD. Some of the material in the Main board and HP-IB/MS control card sections may be of interest to advanced users who need to interface the MSD to external devices.

iq72.bk : chapter8 Page 290 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 291: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

8 Electronics

291

Top board (under covers)

HP-IB/MS control card

Power distribution board(behind electronics panel)

Power supply(behind electronics panel)

Main board

iq72.bk : chapter8 Page 291 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 292: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

292

8 Electronics

Top board

Top board

The top board is mounted on the top plate. It performs the following functions:

• Generates the RF component of the voltage applied to the quadrupole mass filter according to a signal from the main board

• Generates the dc component of the voltage applied to the quadrupole mass filter – the magnitude of this voltage is proportional to the RF voltage

• Generates the 0 to -3000 V dc that is applied to the horn of the electron multiplier

• Amplifies the signal from the thermocouple near the ion source and sends the signal to the main board

• Passes voltages generated on the main board to elements in the ion source and the electron multiplier

• Switches the filament power from one filament to the other when commanded by the data system

The top board contains the following functional elements:

• RF amplifier

• DC amplifiers

• High voltage supply

• Thermocouple amplifier

• Alternate filament relay

• Feedthrough connections

iq72.bk : chapter8 Page 292 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 293: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

8 Electronics

Top board

293

RF amplifier

The RF amplifier supplies the RF component of the voltage to the quadrupole mass filter. The magnitude of this RF voltage determines the mass-to-charge ratio of the ions that will be transmitted through the mass filter. The RF voltage magnitude is controlled by a 0 to -10 V signal on the mass axis line from the main board. The RF amplifier has three main parts:

• RF modulator

• RF transformer

• RF detector

RF modulator

The RF modulator generates a 1 MHz square wave. Its amplitude is proportional to the voltage on the mass axis line. The square wave varies from 0 to +11 V as the mass axis signal varies from 0 to -7.9 V. The output of the RF modulator is disabled if the shutdown line is active.

RF transformer

The output of the RF modulator drives the primary winding of the RF transformer (a transformer-coupled tuned amplifier). The secondary winding consists of two adjustable coils. These coils, together with the quadrupole capacitance, form a circuit that is resonant at 1 MHz. The resonant condition can be detected by measuring the voltage at the DIP test point, or by using the data system to monitor the voltage on the coil dip line to the main board.

The coils can be adjusted with a small nonmetallic tuning wand. As the circuit is tuned through resonance, the voltage dips. For that reason, the adjustment procedure is called “dipping the coils”. The coils do not need to be adjusted during normal operation. If either the quadrupole mass filter or the top board is replaced, the coils will need to be adjusted.

The mass of the transmitted ions ranges from 1.2 to 700 amu, as the output of the RF transformer ranges from approximately 1.2 to 700 V rms.

iq72.bk : chapter8 Page 293 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 294: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

294

8 Electronics

Top board

iq72.bk : chapter8 Page 294 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 295: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

8 Electronics

Top board

295

iq72.bk : chapter8 Page 295 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 296: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

296

8 Electronics

Top board

RF detector

The RF detector samples the 1 MHz RF voltage across the quadrupole. Through full-wave rectification and filtering, the detector produces a dc voltage proportional to the magnitude of the RF voltage. This voltage can be measured at the RF DET test point.

The RF modulator, RF transformer (tuned amplifier), and RF detector are arranged in a closed loop so that the RF output can be very accurately controlled. The RF detector output is equal in magnitude and opposite in polarity to the mass axis signal. The RF detector output is summed with the mass axis signal at the input of the RF modulator.

If the feedback loop is not completed, the operational amplifier at the input of the RF modulator will be driven to its positive limit. This activates the RF fault signal to the main board. When an RF fault occurs, a message is displayed by the data system. If the loop is incomplete for a reason other than an RF amplifier malfunction (as, for example, when another fault shuts down the RF amplifier), this message will not be displayed.

The gain of the RF detector is approximately 0.01 (10 V dc output for about 1000 V RF input). The exact ratio is fixed by a set of three parallel resistors. Two of these are factory selected during the board test process so that the RF detector gain, and hence the gain of the RF amplifier as a whole, will be accurate enough to assure proper mass selection by the quadrupole.

iq72.bk : chapter8 Page 296 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 297: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

8 Electronics

Top board

297

Dc amplifiers

The dc amplifiers supply the dc component of the voltage to the quadrupole mass filter. This dc voltage is proportional to the RF voltage (and hence proportional to the mass axis signal from the main board). The ratio of the dc voltage to RF voltage determines the resolution of the mass filter.

There are two dc amplifiers, U- and U+. The U- amplifier has the output of the RF detector as its input. Its gain is -19.159. This gain can be adjusted slightly by the ratio adjust signal from the main board. As the output of the RF detector varies from 0 to +7.9 V, the output of the U- amplifier varies from 0 to -154 V (-151 V plus the ratio adjust contribution). The U+ amplifier operates as an inverter. It has a gain of -1. The U- and U+ amplifier outputs can be measured at the U- and U+ test points, respectively.

The U+ and U- amplifier outputs are added to the RF voltage. RF filters keep the RF voltage from coupling back into the U+ and U- amplifiers.

The polarity of the dc voltage can be reversed. When the U+/U- polarity line from the main board is held low, the alternate polarity relay is activated. Generally, a particular quadrupole mass filter will operate better on one dc polarity or the other. The better polarity is selected at the factory. Polarity should generally not be change unless the quadrupole is replaced. The better polarity for the mass filter in your MSD is listed on the final-test sheet accompanying the instrument.

When the TTI (true total ion) line is active (low), the TTI relay is energized. This interrupts the RF input to the U- amplifier. This drives the U- and U+ outputs to zero, cutting off the dc voltage to the quadrupole. When there is no dc voltage on the quadrupole, it acts as a high-pass mass filter. The low-mass cutoff is proportional to the amplitude of the RF voltage. This is the true total ion mode of operation.

iq72.bk : chapter8 Page 297 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 298: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

298

8 Electronics

Top board

High voltage supply

The high voltage supply is a non-inverting amplifier with a gain of about 486. It is driven by the HV drive signal from the main board. HV drive varies from 0 to -6.3 V. The high voltage supply generates a 0 to -3000 V output. This voltage is applied to the horn of the electron multiplier. If the high voltage supply is working properly, the HV test point will have the same value as HV drive.

If there is a malfunction in the high voltage amplifier, an HV fault signal is generated and sent to the main board. This causes the data system to display an error message. If the shutdown line is active, the high voltage supply shuts down. This also generates an HV fault signal. If the HV fault is caused by an active shutdown line, the data system may or may not display a high voltage error message. This depends on the software mode.

Thermocouple amplifier

A type K (red/yellow or chromel/alumel) thermocouple is attached to the radiator near the ion source. The signal from the thermocouple is the input to the thermocouple amplifier on the top board. The amplifier's output can be measured at the TEMP test point. The voltage at the test point should be 10 mV/°C. At room temperature this would be approximately 0.25 V. The temperature of this thermocouple is displayed by the data system. It is called the MS temperature.

Alternate filament relay

Filament power is supplied by the main board. This power can be routed to either of two filaments in the ion source. When the alternate filament signal is held low, the alternate filament relay on the top board is energized. This switches the filament power from filament 1 (B) to filament 2 (A). The active filament can be selected from the data system.

Feedthrough connections

Four other dc voltages are generated on the main board. These are the repeller, ion focus, and entrance lens voltages to the ion source, and the x-ray voltage to the electron multiplier. They are passed through the top board and through feedthroughs in the top plate to the ion source and electron multiplier.

iq72.bk : chapter8 Page 298 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 299: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

8 Electronics

Main board

299

Main board

The main board is mounted on a vertical piece of sheet metal called the electronics panel. The main board performs the following functions:

• Receives and decodes digital information from the HP-IB/MS control card

• Sends digital information to the HP-IB/MS control card

• Generates voltages for the ion source filaments, repeller, ion focus lens, entrance lens, x-ray lens, electron multiplier high-voltage control, quadrupole RF voltage control, and dc/RF ratio adjustment

• Generates control signals for alternate filament selection, filament emission current, quadrupole dc polarity, and true total ion mode selection

• Performs logarithmic amplification for the electron multiplier output

• Performs analog-to-digital conversion for the logarithmic amplifier output, coil DIP signal, ion source temperature signal, and foreline pressure signal

• Monitors the too hot, too cold, and foreline pressure signals from the vacuum system and monitors the HV fault and RF fault signals from the top board; based on these signals, implements the safety interlocks

• Activates the shutdown line to the top board when the analyzer electronics should be disabled

• Controls the calibration valve

• Energizes the filaments (one at a time)

• Provides accessory control

• Generates a 1-MHz clock signal for the top board

• Generates ± 250 V dc (nominal) power for dc amplifiers and lens power supplies on the top board

iq72.bk : chapter8 Page 299 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 300: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

300

8 Electronics

Main board

iq72.bk : chapter8 Page 300 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 301: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

8 Electronics

Main board

301

iq72.bk : chapter8 Page 301 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 302: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

302

8 Electronics

Main board

iq72.bk : chapter8 Page 302 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 303: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

8 Electronics

Main board

303

iq72.bk : chapter8 Page 303 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 304: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

304

8 Electronics

Main board

iq72.bk : chapter8 Page 304 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 305: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

8 Electronics

Main board

305

Accessory control

An accessory control connector is located above the power cord on the back panel of the MSD. The connector is part of the accessory control cable which attaches to connector J5 on the main board. It extends the functions of J5 to a more accessible location.

The accessory control connector provides an interface through which external devices such as LEDs and solenoids can be powered and controlled. It also provides a path for inputs such as a remote start signal. The Analytical Products Group (APG) remote connector (labeled REM) at the top of the MSD back panel is normally used to receive remote start signals. The accessory connector can be used for special applications such as GC/IRD/MSD systems. It can also be used for coordination with instruments that cannot communicate on the APG bus.

Input 1

Ground

+5 V

Input 2

Ground

Output 1

24 V

Ground

Output 2

iq72.bk : chapter8 Page 305 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 306: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

306

8 Electronics

Main board

Input lines

Input lines 1 and 2 (pins 8 and 6, respectively) are connected to a 74LS244N logic chip. The logic chip is inactive when the voltage on the lines is above +2.0 V. Line voltages between +2.0 V and +0.7 V produce indeterminate logic states.

When there is no input to the input lines, the voltages on the lines are pulled toward +5 V by 1 kilohm resistors between the input lines and the +5-V power supply. Under these conditions, the logic chip is inactive.

If an input line voltage is pulled down to less than +0.7 V, that input line is active. The input driver must sink 4.3 mV below +0.7 V to ensure that the input signal is recognized. The logic chip does not latch inputs. As a result, an input line voltage must be low (the chip must be active) when the input is being read by the data system. Most software reads the input status several times in quick succession to avoid erroneous responses to a single noise transient.

The status of an input line can be read through the data system by using the XFER command. The response is a number that identifies the states of the two input lines.

Command XFER 20480

Input 1 Input 2 Response

Inactive (high) Inactive (high) 4095

Active (low) Inactive (high) 4094

Inactive (high) Active (low) 4093

Active (low) Active (low) 4092

iq72.bk : chapter8 Page 306 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 307: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

8 Electronics

Main board

307

Output lines

The output driver is a 75462 dual peripheral, positive NAND driver integrated circuit. When the output lines are inactive, their voltages can range from 0 to 24 V depending on the circuit to which they are connected (passive high). A diode in each output circuit limits the lines to a maximum of 24 V. When the output lines are active, they are pulled down to below 0.4 V (active low).

The output lines can be activated or deactivated through the data system by using the XFER command. The state of the lines, active or inactive, is determined by a number, n, appended to the command. The number, n, can be 0-3.

Command XFER 28416,n

Other lines

There are five other lines on the accessory connector: three ground lines, one +5-V dc line, and one +24-V dc line.

The three ground lines are tied directly to the main board ground. The main board ground is tied directly to the instrument ground.

The +24-V line allows the output lines to drive loads such as 24-V relays or solenoids. The +5-V line allows the output lines to drive loads such as LEDs or TTL logic devices. Either the +5-V or +24-V lines can be used to power small interface circuits, which might be useful in achieving hardware compatibility between the MSD and external accessories. Consult a Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer before attempting to draw more than 100 mA for this purpose.

Make sure the voltage drops across resistances do not seriously affect the 0.7 – 2.0 V margin on the input lines. For example, if a ground wire is too small and there is a 0.8-V drop on the ground due to the external load, the input circuitry may not correctly read an active (low) input.

n Output 1 Output 2

0 Inactive (high) Inactive (high)

1 Active (low) Inactive (high)

2 Inactive (high) Active (low)

3 Active (low) Active (low)

iq72.bk : chapter8 Page 307 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 308: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

308

8 Electronics

HP-IB/MS control card

HP-IB/MS control card

The HP-IB/MS control card is located to the left of the main board on the electronics panel. The HP-IB/MS control card has two main functions:

• Providing a communication interface between the MSD and the data system

• Providing real-time control of the MSD, freeing the data system for other tasks

Functional areas of the HP-IB/MS control card include:

• Instrument controller

• Data processor

• Main processor

• Serial communication processor

• HP-IB controller

• Remote control processor

Each of these is described in the following material.

Instrument controller

The instrument controller controls scanning of the mass filter. It also collects signal data from the analog-to-digital converter and passes that data to the data processor. The instrument controller can also dynamically ramp the lens voltages.

Data processor

The data processor filters data collected by the instrument and packages it into a format the data system can accept. This data is passed to the main processor through a high-speed serial data link.

iq72.bk : chapter8 Page 308 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 309: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

8 Electronics

HP-IB/MS control card

309

Main processor

The main processor receives data from the data processor. It stores the data until it is requested by the data system. The main processor also controls real-time events such as opening valves and changing scan or SIM parameters during data acquisition.

Serial communication processor

The serial communication processor controls communications between the main processor and the data processor and instrument controller. It communicates with the main processor through the serial bus. It communicates with the data processor and instrument controller through a parallel bus. The serial communications processor is also responsible for boot-up and control of the instrument controller and data processor.

iq72.bk : chapter8 Page 309 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 310: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

310

8 Electronics

HP-IB/MS control card

HP-IB controller

The HP-IB controller manages communication between the main processor and the data system.

Remote control processor

The remote control processor is the interface to the Analytical Products Group (APG) remote control bus. It synchronizes start-run signals with GCs, ALSs, and purge and traps. The functions of the remote control processor are extended by a cable to the APG remote connector on the back panel of the MSD.

MSDs and HP 6890 Series GCs have standard 9-pin, D-shaped, APG remote connectors. The connectors are located on the back panels of those instruments. HP 5890 GCs have a 12-pin, remote start connector that serves many of the same functions as the APG remote connector. It is located on the GC main board.

A special cable (35900-60700) is available to connect the APG remote connector on the MSD to the remote control connector on an HP 5890 GC.

An APG remote control cable (G1530-60930) is available to connect HP 6890 Series GCs and MSDs.

Start Ground

Ready

Ground

Ready

Start

iq72.bk : chapter8 Page 310 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 311: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

8 Electronics

HP-IB/MS control card

311

Interfacing to external devices

It is often necessary to communicate with external devices (for example, a purge-and-trap) during a run. Typically, these communications are:

• Requests to send a system ready signal

• Receive a start run signal from an external device

• Program the timing of events during a run

System ready

When interfacing to an external device, it is often desirable to send a system ready signal to the device. In the case of a multi-sample Tekmar purge-and-trap, each sample is purged onto a trap where it waits for a ready signal. On receipt of the ready signal, the desorb cycle begins. When a specific temperature has been reached, the purge-and-trap closes a contact to indicate the run has started.

The ready pin on the remote control connector on the GC is held low at all times except when the GC, MSD, and data system are all ready. On system ready, a logic high of 5 V dc is present between that pin and any ground. This same high can be detected between the ready and ground pins on the APG connector on the MSD.

Start run input

The best way to generate a start run signal is to use the remote control connector on the GC. Since remote cables are made for most common devices, this is often the simplest way. A general-purpose remote cable (05890-61080), which is also available, terminates in spade lugs. Care must be taken to ensure that the system is actually ready before the start run signal is sent.

If necessary, the APG remote connector on the back of the MSD can be used to send the start run signal. A contact closure between the start and ground pins will start the run if the system is ready.

iq72.bk : chapter8 Page 311 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 312: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

312

8 Electronics

Power supply

Power supply

The power supply is mounted next to the power distribution board on the electronics panel below the vacuum chamber. It converts ac line power into the dc voltages used by the rest of the electronics. The power supply generates the following dc voltages:

• +24 V (nominal) with a maximum of 0.5 A

• +15 V (nominal) with a maximum of 1.0 A

• -15 V (nominal) with a maximum of 0.2 A

• +5 V (nominal) with a maximum of 1.5 A

Power distribution board

The power distribution board is mounted on the opposite side of the electronics panel from the HP-IB/MS control card. The power distribution board performs the following functions:

• Distributes ac line power to the dc power supply and to the cooling fan

• Turns on the diffusion pump once the foreline pressure is low enough

• Regulates the ac power to the diffusion pump heater

• Disables the diffusion pump if the foreline pressure is too high or if the diffusion pump is too hot or too cold

• Passes the foreline pressure signal from the foreline gauge to the main board

The power regulator ensures that the diffusion pump heater receives constant power, even if there are fluctuations in the ac line voltage. It measures the voltage across the heater and the current through it, multiplies them together, and compares the result with a standard value. Any discrepancy is applied as an error signal to adjust the power.

If the power distribution board senses a malfunction in the diffusion pump power regulator, it shuts off power to the diffusion pump.

iq72.bk : chapter8 Page 312 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 313: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

8 Electronics

Power distribution board

313

iq72.bk : chapter8 Page 313 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 314: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

314

8 Electronics

Connectors and controls

Connectors and controls

All connectors and controls are located on the back panel of the MSD. These include:

• APG remote control connector

• I/O (HP-IB) connector

• Accessory connector

• Ac power cord

• Power switch

• Foreline pump cord receptacle

The following material describes the functions of these connectors and controls.

APG remote connector

The Analytical Products Group (APG) remote connector is the external connector for the APG remote control circuitry on the HP-IB/MS control card. It receives remote start signals from the GC.

I/O connector

The HP-IB cable from the data system is connected to the I/O (HP-IB) connector.

Accessory connector

The accessory connector provides an interface through which external devices such as LEDs and solenoids can be powered and controlled. In addition, it provides a path for inputs such as a remote start signal from devices that cannot communicate on the APG bus.

Ac power cord

The ac power cord brings in all electrical power for the MSD.

iq72.bk : chapter8 Page 314 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 315: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

8 Electronics

Connectors and controls

315

Power switch

The power switch is a circuit breaker. It is used to switch the MSD on and off. It also functions as a circuit breaker in case of power surges.

Foreline pump power cord receptacle

The foreline pump power cord receptacle provides ac power for the foreline pump. If the power switch is off, no power is supplied to the foreline pump.

APG remote connector

I/O (HP-IB) connector

Accessory connector

Ac power cord

Power (on/off) switch

Foreline pump power cord

iq72.bk : chapter8 Page 315 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 316: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

316

8 Electronics

Status display

Status display

The MSD has a status display along the lower front edge of the instrument. It includes three status LEDs:

• Power

• Analyzer

• Cal (calibration) Valve

Each LED provides information about the status of the MSD. In addition, if power to the MSD is interrupted, all three LEDs will blink until the data system reestablishes contact with the MSD and downloads the proper information to the HP-IB/MS control card.

iq72.bk : chapter8 Page 316 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 317: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

8 Electronics

Status display

317

Power status LED

The power status LED lights when the MSD is connected to a power source and the power switch is on.

Analyzer status LED

The analyzer (ion source, mass filter, and electron multiplier) is frequently off even though the MSD is powered up. This helps extend the life spans of the filaments and electron multiplier. The analyzer status LED lights when the MSD receives the MSON signal from the data system. The analyzer LED should always be on during data acquisition or tuning.

Cal valve status LED

The cal (calibration) valve status LED lights when the data system instructs the calibration valve to open.

iq72.bk : chapter8 Page 317 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 318: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

318

8 Electronics

Parallel/remote board & cable (HP 5890 GC only)

Parallel/remote board & cable (HP 5890 GC only)

An HP 5890 GC has only one remote control connector. It is located on the GC main board. To allow more devices to be connected to the HP 5890 GC, the parallel/remote board and cable are supplied in the MSD shipping kit. The parallel/remote board is a small printed circuit board with several connectors. The parallel/remote cable connects the parallel/remote board to the remote control connector on the GC. The board and cable allow up to three devices (instead of 1) to be connected to the remote control connector.

Parallel/remote board

Remote control cable

Remote control connector

HP 5972A MSD

Parallel/remote cable

HP 5890 GC

iq72.bk : chapter8 Page 318 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 319: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

9

Parts

This chapter lists parts that can be ordered for your MSD

Electronics, 322Vacuum system, 326Analyzer, 330GC interface, 334Consumables and maintenance supplies, 338

iq72.bk : chapter9 Page 319 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 320: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

320

Parts

This chapter lists parts that can be ordered for use in maintaining your HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series MSDs. It includes most of the parts or assemblies in the MSDs. This chapter is organized so that related parts are grouped together.

To order parts

To order parts for your MSD, address the order or inquiry to your local Hewlett-Packard office. Supply them with the following information:

• Model and serial number of your MSD

• HP part number(s) of the part(s) needed

• Quantity of each part needed

Some parts are available as rebuilt assemblies

Rebuilt assemblies pass all the same tests and meet all the same specifications as new parts. Rebuilt assemblies can be identified by their part numbers. The first two digits of the last five digits of the part number are 69 or 89 (i.e., XXXXX-69XXX). Rebuilt assemblies are available on an exchange-only basis. You must return the equivalent part to Hewlett-Packard after you receive the rebuilt assembly or a price penalty will be assessed.

iq72.bk : chapter9 Page 320 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 321: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

9 Parts

321

If you cannot find a part you need

If a part you need is not listed in this chapter, check the Hewlett-Packard

Analytical Supplies Catalog. If you still can not find it, contact your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer or your local Hewlett-Packard office.

iq72.bk : chapter9 Page 321 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 322: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

322

9 Parts

Electronics

Electronics

The printed circuit boards in the MSD are available only as complete assemblies. Individual electronic components are not available. This section contains the following parts: cables, fuses, printed circuit boards (electronic assemblies).

Table 10 Internal cables

Description HP part number

Accessory connector cable (main board to accessory connector) 05972-60437Analyzer cable kit (all wiring inside the vacuum manifold) 05972-60230

high voltage/x-ray wire 05972-60016ion source cable (printed circuit board and wiring for ion source) 05972-60015

APG connector cable (HP-IB/MS control card to APG connector) 05972-60438Coupler (for status display cables) 1252-5255Diffusion pump control cable (power distribution board to main board) G1800-60422Diffusion pump extender cable (power distribution board to back panel) 05972-60423Diffusion pump power cable (includes thermal switches) 05972-60401Filament cable (top board to main board, twisted pair) 05971-60412Foreline gauge cable 05971-60413GC to GC interface (GC interface heater/sensor assembly)

HP 5972A MSD 05971-60105HP 6890 Series MSD 05972-60106

HP-IB connector cable (from HP-IB/MS control card to HP-IB connector) 05971-60417Power supply cables

ac input (power supply to power distribution board) 05972-60426dc output (power supply to main board) 05972-60427

Ribbon cable (top board to main board) 05971-60411Signal cable (top board to main board) 05971-60416Status display cable

long (coupler to HP-IB/MS control card) 05972-60435short (status display to coupler) 05972-60436

iq72.bk : chapter9 Page 322 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 323: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

9 Parts

Electronics

323

Table 11 External cables

Description HP part number

Gauge controller cable (triode gauge tube to gauge controller) 8120-6573HP-IB cable, 1-meter 8120-4654IRD external accessory control cable (used in GC/IRD/MSD systems –

HP 5890 GC only)05971-60429

Parallel/remote cable (HP 5890 GC only) 05990-60019Remote control cable

HP 5972A MSD to HP 5890 GC 35900-60700HP 6890 Series MSD to HP 6890 Series GC G1530-60930General purpose (one end without connector, HP 5890 GC to ?) 05890-61080

Filament cable05971-60412

Ribbon cable05971-60411

Signal cable05971-60416

APG connector cable05972-60438

HP-IB connector cable05971-60417

Accessory connector cable 05972-60437

iq72.bk : chapter9 Page 323 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 324: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

324

9 Parts

Electronics

Table 12 Fuses and circuit breakers

Description HP part number

Circuit breaker (main power switch)110/120 V ac 3105-0172220/240 V ac 3105-0173

Diffusion pump fuses2-amp (220/240 V ac) 2110-00024-amp (110/120 V ac) 2110-0055

Table 13 Printed circuit boards

Description HP part number

HP-IB/MS control card 05990-69406Main board 05972-69020Parallel/remote board (HP 5890 GC only – installed on the GC) 05990-60320Power distribution board 05971-60003Power supply 0950-2552Status display (not shown) 05972-60030Top board 05971-69001

iq72.bk : chapter9 Page 324 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 325: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

9 Parts

Electronics

325

Top board (under covers)05971-69001

HP-IB/MS control card05990-69406

Power distribution board(behind electronics panel)05971-60003

Power supply(behind electronics panel)0950-2552

Main board05972-69020

iq72.bk : chapter9 Page 325 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 326: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

326

9 Parts

Vacuum system

Vacuum system

This section lists replacement parts available for the vacuum system. It includes:clamps, O-rings and seals, and vacuum system components.

Table 14 Clamps

Description HP part number

KF10/16 (for foreline hose fitting) 0100-1397KF25 (hinged, for GC interface and bottom of foreline trap) 0100-1398KF25 (stamped) 0100-0549KF40 (for top of foreline trap) 0100-1426KF50 (for diffusion pump) 0100-1395Shipping clamps 05972-00200

Table 15 O-rings and seals

Description HP part number

KF10 O-ring assembly (for foreline hose fitting) 0100-1183KF25 blank flange 0100-1396KF25 coseal (for GC interface) 0100-1597KF25 O-ring assembly (for bottom of foreline trap – not compatible with

inlet filter) 0100-1551

KF40 O-ring assembly (for top of foreline trap) 0100-1425KF50 coseal (for diffusion pump) 0100-1804Manifold O-ring 0905-1242Triode gauge tube O-ring 0905-1070

iq72.bk : chapter9 Page 326 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 327: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

9 Parts

Vacuum system

327

Manifold O-ring 0905-1242

O-ring assembly KF10 0100-1183 KF25 0100-1551 KF40 0100-1425

Coseal KF25 0100-1597 KF50 0100-1804

Triode gauge tube O-ring 0905-1070

iq72.bk : chapter9 Page 327 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 328: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

328

9 Parts

Vacuum system

Table 16 Vacuum system components

Description HP part number

Baffle (inside stem of triode gauge tube) 05972-00015Blank flange, KF25 0100-1396Calibration valve assembly (includes vial) 05972-60101

O-ring 0905-1217vial 05980-20018

Calibration valve fitting 0100-1637Collar (for triode gauge tube) 05972-60210Diffusion pump, complete

110/120 V ac 05972-60415220/240 V ac 05972-60416

Diffusion pump extender cable (power distribution board to back panel) 05972-60423Diffusion pump power cable (includes thermal switches) 05972-60401Fan

110/120 V ac 05972-60540220/240 V ac 05972-60541

Foreline hose 05971-60119Foreline pump (for all voltage ranges) 3162-0184

power cord 8120-6476Foreline trap

body 05971-20562cap 05971-20571lower screen 05971-00560upper screen 05971-00561

Foreline gauge assembly (not shown) 05972-60545Manifold baffle cap 05972-20554Manifold baffle cap O-ring 0905-1237Screws, for manifold baffle cap 0515-1034Top plate (includes feedthroughs) 05971-60120Triode gauge tube 0960-0897Vacuum manifold 05972-20553

iq72.bk : chapter9 Page 328 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 329: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

9 Parts

Vacuum system

329

Collar 05972-60210

Top plate 05971-60120

Foreline hose 05971-60119

Fan 110/120 V ac 05972-60540 220/240 V ac 05972-60541

Diffusion pump power cable 05972-60401

Calibration valve assembly 05972-60101

Calibration valve fitting0100-1637

Diffusion pump 110/120 V ac 05972-60415 220/240 V ac 05972-60416

Foreline trap body 05971-20562 cap 05971-20571 lower screen 05971-00560 upper screen 05971-00561

Vacuum manifold 05972-20553

Foreline pump 3162-0184

Triode gauge tube 0960-0897

Manifold baffle cap (do not remove)05972-20554

iq72.bk : chapter9 Page 329 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 330: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

330

9 Parts

Analyzer

Analyzer

This table lists the replacement parts for the analyzer. The individual ion source parts are listed the next table.

Table 17 Analyzer parts

Description HP part number

Analyzer (ion source, mass filter, and detector) with top plate and top board, tested

05972-69228

analyzer cable kit (wiring inside manifold) 05972-60230electron multiplier (complete) 05971-80102

electron multiplier horn 05971-80103interface (GC interface) socket 05971-20133ion source, complete 05972-60226magnet assembly 05971-60160quadrupole contacts (1 pair) 05971-60142quadrupole spring clip 05971-20182quadrupole support, detector end 05971-20136quadrupole support, source end 05971-20135radiator 05971-20120screws

M2 x 5L, ion source mounting screw 0515-1077M2 x 6L, detector mounting screw 0515-0221M3 x 8L, analyzer mounting screw 0515-0319

top plate (includes feedthroughs) 05971-60120

iq72.bk : chapter9 Page 330 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 331: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

9 Parts

Analyzer

331

Radiator05971-20120

Quadrupole support (detector end)05971-20136

Top plate05971-60120

Interface socket05971-20133

Quadrupole contacts (1 pair) 05971-60142

Magnet assembly05971-60160

Electron multiplier horn05971-80103

iq72.bk : chapter9 Page 331 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 332: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

332

9 Parts

Analyzer

Table 18 Ion source parts

Description HP part number

Ion source, complete 05972-60226drawout cylinder G1072-20008drawout plate 05971-20134entrance lens (with pin) 05971-20126filament assembly 05972-60053ion focus lens (with pin) 05971-20143lens insulator (pair) 05971-20130repeller assembly 05971-60170screws

M2 x 5L, ion source mounting screw 0515-1077M2 x 8L, filament retaining screw 0515-1046M3 x 2.4L, set screw 0515-1446

source body 05971-20128

iq72.bk : chapter9 Page 332 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 333: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

9 Parts

Analyzer

333

Entrance lens (with pin)05971-20126

Lens insulator (pair)05971-20130

Ion focus lens (with pin)05971-20143

Drawout cylinderG1072-20008

Set screw, 3M x 2.4L0515-1446

Filament assembly05972-60053

Repeller assembly05971-60170

Screws, M2 x 8L0515-1046

Filament assembly05972-60053

Source body05971-20128

Drawout plate05971-20134

iq72.bk : chapter9 Page 333 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 334: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

334

9 Parts

GC interface

GC interface

This table lists the replacement parts related to the GC interface. Effluent splitter parts are listed in the next table.

Table 19 GC interface

Description HP part number

GC interface (complete)HP 5972A MSD (100 V ac heater) 05972-60040HP 6890 Series MSD (40 V dc heater) 05972-60021

GC interface partscolumn nut (not shown) 05988-20066guide tube 05971-20307heater sleeve 05988-20210heater/sensor assembly (includes cable)

HP 5972A MSD 05971-60105HP 6890 Series MSD 05972-60106

insulation (not shown) 05971-20301lockwashers, for screws for heater sleeve 2190-0586screws, M4 x 16L, for heater sleeve 0515-0071transfer tube

tip (gold-plated) 05971-20305welded assembly 05971-60302

Tape (for securing insulation) 0460-1300

iq72.bk : chapter9 Page 334 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 335: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

9 Parts

GC interface

335

Guide tube05971-20307

Heater sleeve05988-20210

Tip05971-20305

Welded assembly05971-60302

Heater/sensor assemblyHP 5972A MSD 05971-60105HP 6890 Series MSD 05972-60106

iq72.bk : chapter9 Page 335 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 336: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

336

9 Parts

GC interface

Table 20 Effluent splitter

Description HP part number

Ferrulesfor megabore (0.53-mm id) column 5062-3538for restrictor column 5062-3507for wide-bore (0.32-mm id) column 5062-3506

Mounting plateHP 5972A MSD 05988-00080HP 6890 Series MSD 05972-00017

Nutfor capillary columns 05988-20066for vent tube 2740-0015

Restrictor column (0.115-mm) 05971-20590Sealing ring, for vent tube 0905-0938Split tube (used only for wide-bore columns) 05988-20224Tee connector 05995-20174Vent tube 1530-2163

iq72.bk : chapter9 Page 336 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 337: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

9 Parts

GC interface

337

Vent tube 1530-2163

Nut (for vent tube)2740-0015

Sealing ring0905-0938

Nut (for column)05988-20066

Restrictor column05971-20590

Ferrule (for restrictor)5062-3507

Tee connector05995-20174

Split tube (wide-bore only)05988-20224

Ferrulewide-bore 5062-3506megabore 5062-3538

Column (wide-bore or megabore)

iq72.bk : chapter9 Page 337 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 338: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

338

9 Parts

Consumables and maintenance supplies

Consumables and maintenance supplies

This chapter lists parts available for cleaning and maintaining your MSD. These include cleaning and maintenance supplies, ferrules, fuses, parts and samples, and O-rings and seals.

Table 21 Maintenance supplies

Description HP part number

Abrasive paper, 30 µm 5061-5896Alumina powder 8660-0791Cloths, clean 05980-60051Cotton swabs (package of 100) 5080-5400Gloves, clean

large 8650-0030small 8650-0029

Paint, touch-up, Glacier Gray – for HP 6890 Series MSD only 6010-1497Tool kit 05972-60566Video tape (cleaning the ion source)

VHS-NTSC format 05972-90011VHS-PAL format 05972-90012

iq72.bk : chapter9 Page 338 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 339: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

9 Parts

Consumables and maintenance supplies

339

Table 22 Ferrules

Description HP part number

Blank, graphite-vespel 0100-0691GC interface and splitter

0.3-mm id, 85% Vespel 15% graphite, for 0.1-mm id columns 5062-35070.4-mm id, 85% Vespel 15% graphite, for 0.2-mm id and

0.25-mm id columns 5062-3508

0.5-mm id, 85% Vespel 15% graphite, for 0.32-mm id columns 5062-35060.8-mm id, 85% Vespel 15% graphite, for 0.53-mm id columns 5062-3538

Injection port 0.27-mm id, 90% Vespel 10% graphite, for 0.1-mm id columns 5062-35180.37-mm id, 90% Vespel 10% graphite, for 0.2-mm id columns 5062-35160.40-mm id, 90% Vespel 10% graphite, for 0.25-mm id columns 5181-33230.47-mm id, 90% Vespel 10% graphite, for 0.32-mm id columns 5062-35140.74-mm id, 90% Vespel 10% graphite, for 0.53-mm id columns 5062-3512

iq72.bk : chapter9 Page 339 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 340: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

340

9 Parts

Consumables and maintenance supplies

Table 23 Miscellaneous parts and samples

Description HP part number

Cable ties 1400-0482Cover (cardboard, for protecting the MSD during shipping) 05972-80005Diffusion pump fluid (20 ml) 6040-0809Electron multiplier horn 05971-80103Filament assembly 05972-60053Foreline pump fluid (1 liter) 6040-0834Foreline trap pellets (molecular sieve) 9301-1104Grommet, 0.875-inch id (for cutouts in sheet metal to mount the

vacuum manifold) 0400-0268

HCB performance evaluation sample (checkout sample) 8500-5808Hydrocarbon sample kit 05970-60045PFTBA sample kit 05971-60571Shipping bracket (for use with shipping crate)

HP 5972A MSD 05972-00005HP 6890 Series MSD 05972-00006

Shipping crate 05972-80020Shipping kit

HP 5890 GC (Option #201) 05890-61455HP 6890 Series GC G1530-60860MSD 05972-60565

Vacuum gaugesforeline gauge assembly 05972-60545triode gauge tube 0960-0897

iq72.bk : chapter9 Page 340 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 341: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

9 Parts

Consumables and maintenance supplies

341

Table 24 O-rings and seals

Description HP part number

KF10 O-ring assembly (foreline hose fitting) 0100-1183KF25 O-ring assembly (bottom of foreline trap – not compatible with

inlet filter) 0100-1551

KF25 coseal (GC interface) 0100-1597KF40 O-ring assembly (top of foreline trap) 0100-1425KF50 coseal (diffusion pump) 0100-1804Manifold O-ring 0905-1242Triode gauge tube O-ring 0905-1070

iq72.bk : chapter9 Page 341 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 342: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

342

iq72.bk : chapter9 Page 342 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 343: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

343

Index

219 width, 285

AAbrasive cleaning of the ion source, 213Absolute abundance, 92Absolute pressure, 268Abundance

absolute, 92low for m/z 502, 74relative, 74, 92

Ac power. See Line voltageAc power cord. See Power cordAccessories for the MSD, 6Accessory connector, 305, 314Accessory control, 305

input lines, 306other lines, 307output lines, 307

Adding foreline pump fluid, 168Adjusting the RF coils, 240Air and water check, 125 – 126Air leaks, 124

as a source of contamination, 139confirming, 124 – 125correcting, 130 – 135finding in the GC, 127finding in the MSD, 128isolating the source of, 126symptoms of, 124

ALS, testing communications to the, 147Alternate filament relay, 298AMU gain, 285AMU offset, 285

Analyzer, 275 – 288basic components of the, 276electron multiplier, 287ion source, 280maintaining the, 202mass filter, 284part numbers, 330parts that should not be disturbed, 203radiator, 278reinstalling the, 206removing the, 204typical temperatures of components, 278

Analyzer status LED, 317Analyzer temperature

too low, 102See also MS temperature

APG remote connector, 310, 314Autotune, 56

relative abundances of m/z 502 produced by different autotunes, 92

See also the documentation and online help supplied with the software

See also TuningAuxiliary heated zones, 38Average linear velocity, calculating the, 55

BBackground, excessive in the mass spectra, 82Bleed. See Column bleed

iq72.bk : iq72.ix Page 343 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 344: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

344

Index

CCables

part number for internal cables, 322part numbers for external cables, 323

Calibration valve, 264correcting a leaking, 134O-rings, 254reinstalling the, 196removing the, 194testing the, 152

Calibration valve status LED, 317Calibration vial, 264

filling the, 188reinstalling the, 188removing the, 186

Cannot achieve constant peak widths, 106Capillary columns. See ColumnsCarrier gas

contaminated, 138flow, 38purging the lines, 21starting flow before turning on the MSD, 36See also Column flow

Cautions, inside front cover of manual

Checkingdiffusion pump fluid level, 180foreline pump fluid level, 168

Checklist, pre-operation, 36Chemical residue, hazardous, 165ChemStation, 36

setting the GC interface temperature from, 52software, different versions for HP 5972A and

HP 6890 Series MSDs, 36using to pump down the MSD, 40using to tune the MSD, 56using to vent the MSD, 58

CI ion source, 6

CI tune, 56Circuit breaker. See Power switchClamps, part numbers, 326Cleaning solvents, a source of contamination, 139Cleaning the ion source, 212Cleanliness, importance during maintenance, 202Column bleed

as a source of contamination, 138causes of, 20effect of oxygen on, 20minimizing, 21

Column flow, 38calculating average linear velocity, 55calculating volumetric flow rate, 55for optimum sensitivity, 55limits, 55measuring with the MSD, 38, 54

Column nut leak, correcting, 130Columns

conditioning a capillary column, 22conditioning before installation, 20installing, 17installing a megabore, 32installing a splitter for large-diameter, 26installing a wide-bore, 30installing capillary direct, 24restrictions on, 18table of characteristics, 19types that can be used with the MSD, 18See also Column flow

Conditioning capillary columnsimportance of, 20procedure for, 22temperature to use, 21, 22

Connectors, 314Consumables, part numbers of, 338

iq72.bk : iq72.ix Page 344 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 345: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

Index

345

Contaminationavoiding after cleaning the ion source, 215checking for, 136finding sources of in a GC, 138finding sources of in an MSD, 139table of common contaminants, 137

Controls, 314Coseals, 254

DData system, 6

control over pumpdown, 37controlling temperatures with the, 38using to ensure correct venting, 39See also ChemStation

Dc polarity, 285Detector. See Electron multiplierDetector B heated zone, 38, 272Diffusion pump, 260

automatic control of, 260, 262connector pin functions, 155effect of low fluid level in, 111reinstalling the, 184removing the, 178replacing the fuses, 248resistance values, 154testing the, 154too cold error message, 112too hot error message, 110See also Diffusion pump fluid

Diffusion pump fluidas a source of contamination, 140checking the, 180replacing the, 182

Dipping the coils, 240DOS ChemStation. See ChemStationDrawout plate and cylinder, 282Drying cleaned ion source parts, 214

EEffluent splitter. See SplitterElectron multiplier, 287

horn, 288reinstalling the horn, 226removing the horn, 224X-ray lens, 288See also Electron multiplier voltage

Electron multiplier temperature, 278, 279Electron multiplier voltage, 288

significance of a steady increase in, 156Electronics, 289 – 318

connectors and controls, 314danger to from electrostatic discharge, 166HP-IB/MS control card, 308locations of major components, 291main board, 299maintaining the, 238parallel/remote board and cable, 318part numbers, 322power distribution board, 312power supply, 312status display, 316top board, 292

Electronics panelreinstalling the, 244removing the, 243

Electrostatic discharge, danger to the electronics from, 166

EM. See Electron multiplierEmission current, 280

if there is none, 121Entrance lens, 283

gain, 283offset, 283

iq72.bk : iq72.ix Page 345 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 346: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

346

Index

Error messagescannot achieve constant peak widths, 106difficulty in the mass filter electronics, 108difficulty with the detector HV supply, 109latched, 69list of, 69mass spec interface card is not active, 118MS does not respond, 119no peaks found, 120numbers, 69the diffusion pump is or was too hot, 110the diffusion pump is too cold, 112the foreline pressure has exceeded

300 mTorr, 116there is no emission current, 121there is not enough signal to begin the

tune, 122ESD. See Electrostatic dischargeExhaust, venting the foreline pump, 36, 165, 256

FFan, 262

checking the, 71cleaning the, 184incorrect operation of the, 71

Feedthrough connections, 298Ferrules

conditioning, 21part numbers, 339

Filaments, 280emission current, 280parameters affecting the, 280reinstalling the, 222removing the, 220testing the, 142

Fingerprints, as a source of contamination, 140Flow rate

See Column flow

Foreline gauge, 258reinstalling the, 192removing the, 190See also Foreline pressure

Foreline pressureexceeding 300 mTorr, 116monitoring, 37, 42too high, 96too low, 95typical, 43

Foreline pump, 256ballast control, 256effect of low fluid level in, 96incorrect operation of the, 72mode switch, 256power cord receptacle, 315venting the exhaust, 36, 165, 256See also Foreline pump fluid

Foreline pump fluidadding, 168as a source of contamination, 140checking the, 168draining the, 170refilling the pump with, 172

Foreline trap, 256adding pellets, 176checking the, 117effect of saturated pellets in, 97removing the pellets, 174

Foreline vacuum gauge. See Foreline gaugeFuses

part numbers, 324replacing the diffusion pump fuses, 248

iq72.bk : iq72.ix Page 346 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 347: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

Index

347

GGas chromatographs. See GCGauge controller, 268

abnormal or blank display, 47, 98connecting to the triode gauge, 44if the power indicator does not light, 98, 100indicated vs. actual pressure, 37pressure display format, 47pressure range, 47switching off the, 58switching on the, 46using to monitor vacuum manifold

pressure, 37GC, 4

problems causing low sensitivity, 88sources of contamination in the, 138testing communications to the, 147See also ColumnsSee also GC interfaceSee also GC keypad

GC columns. See ColumnsGC interface, 271 – 273

checking the, 104failure to heat up, 104heated zones controlling the, 272heater, 38, 272maintaining the, 229part numbers, 334reinstalling the heater/sensor assembly

(HP 5972A MSD), 232reinstalling the heater/sensor assembly

(HP 6890 Series MSD), 236removing the heater/sensor assembly

(HP 5972A MSD), 230removing the heater/sensor assembly

(HP 6890 Series MSD), 234sensor (thermocouple), 272symptoms of poor contact with the interface

socket, 102

temperature range, 272See also GC interface temperature

GC interface temperature, 38limits, 49, 51, 52setting from an HP 5890 GC, 48setting from an HP 6890 Series GC, 50setting from the ChemStation, 52typical setpoints, 49, 51, 52

GC keypadsetting GC interface temperature from an

HP 5890 GC, 48setting GC interface temperature from an

HP 6890 Series GC, 50GC/IRD/MSD interface, 6Grounded wrist strap, 166

HHeated zones, used to power the GC interface

heater, 38Heater. See GC interfaceHeater sleeve, loose, 103Heater/sensor assembly

reinstalling the (HP 5972A MSD), 232reinstalling the (HP 6890 Series MSD), 236removing the (HP 5972A MSD), 230removing the (HP 6890 Series MSD), 234

High masses, poor sensitivity at, 92High vacuum

See Vacuum manifold pressureHigh voltage supply, 298

difficulty with, 109HP 5890 GC, 4

installing a splitter in, 26setting GC interface temperature from the

keypad, 48HP 6890 Series GC, 4

installing a splitter in, 28setting GC interface temperature from the

keypad, 50

iq72.bk : iq72.ix Page 347 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 348: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

348

Index

HP-IB communications, testing, 144HP-IB/MS control card, 308

data processor, 308HP-IB controller, 310instrument controller, 308interfacing to external devices, 311main processor, 309not active, 118remote control processor, 310replacing the, 242serial communication processor, 309testing the, 144

II/O connector, 314Indicated pressure, 268Injection port, as a source of contamination, 138Installing

a column capillary direct, 24a megabore column, 32a splitter in an HP 5890 GC, 26a splitter in an HP 6890 Series GC, 28a wide-bore column, 30GC columns, 17 – 33

Interface socketinspecting the, 102reinstalling the, 218removing the, 208

Interfacing to external devices, 311start run input, 311system ready signal, 311

Ion abundance ratios, 125See also Abundance

Ion focus, 283significance of a steadily increasing, 156

Ion gauge tube, 268

Ion source, 280abrasively cleaning parts of the, 213body, 280cleaning the, 212diagnosing a dirty, 156disassembling the, 210drawout plate and cylinder, 282drying cleaned parts, 214entrance lens, 283factors affecting contamination of the, 156filaments, 280ion focus, 283part numbers, 332parts that should not be cleaned, 212reassembling the, 216reinstalling the, 218removing the, 208repeller, 282temperature, 278, 279testing for contamination, 156ultrasonically cleaning parts of the, 214

IRD interface. See GC/IRD/MSD interfaceIsotopes, missing or incorrect ratios, 80

JJet separator, 20

KKF fittings, correcting leaks in, 132KF seals, 254

LLeaks. See Air leaksLEDs. See Status displayLine voltage

checking the, 70effects of variations in, 114

iq72.bk : iq72.ix Page 348 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 349: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

Index

349

Low sensitivityat high masses, 92general, 88

Mm/z, 284m/z 18, 28, and 32, as symptoms of an air leak, 83m/z 219, adjusting the peak width at, 76m/z 502

decreasing relative abundance of, 157lower than expected abundances of, 74

Main board, 299accessory control, 305block diagrams of the, 300 – 304dangerous voltages on the, 163replacing the, 241

Maintenance, 159 – 248adding foreline trap pellets, 176adjusting RF coils, 240analyzer, 202avoiding dangerous voltages during, 163avoiding dangerously hot parts during, 164checking and adding foreline pump fluid, 168checking the diffusion pump fluid, 180cleaning the ion source, 212disassembling the ion source, 210draining the foreline pump fluid, 170electronics, 238filling the foreline pump, 172GC interface, 229reassembling the ion source, 216refilling the calibration vial, 188reinstalling a filament, 222reinstalling a triode gauge tube, 200reinstalling the analyzer, 206reinstalling the calibration valve, 196reinstalling the calibration vial, 188reinstalling the diffusion pump, 184reinstalling the electron multiplier horn, 226reinstalling the electronics panel, 244

reinstalling the foreline gauge, 192reinstalling the heater/sensor assembly

(HP 5972A MSD), 232reinstalling the heater/sensor assembly

(HP 6890 Series MSD), 236reinstalling the ion source, 218removing a filament, 220removing the analyzer, 220removing the calibration valve, 194removing the calibration vial, 186removing the diffusion pump, 178removing the electron multiplier horn, 224removing the electronics panel, 243removing the foreline gauge, 190removing the foreline trap pellets, 174removing the heater/sensor assembly

(HP 5972A MSD), 230removing the heater/sensor assembly

(HP 6890 Series MSD), 234removing the ion source, 208removing the triode gauge tube, 198replacing the diffusion pump fluid, 182replacing the diffusion pump fuses, 248replacing the HP-IB/MS control card, 242replacing the main board, 241replacing the power distribution board, 245replacing the power supply, 247replacing the top board, 239safety during, 163 – 166schedule, 160supplies for, 162tools for, 161vacuum system, 167

Malfunctions. See Symptoms of malfunctionsManifold O-ring, 254

correcting leaks in the, 131Manual tune, 56Mass assignments, incorrect, 94

iq72.bk : iq72.ix Page 349 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 350: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

350

Index

Mass filter, 284219 width, 285amu gain, 285amu offset, 285danger to from solvents, 286dc polarity, 285difficulty in the electronics, 108parameters, 284temperature, 278

Mass spectraexcessive, periodic noise in, 79high background in, 82

Mass-to-charge ratio, 284See also m/z

Maximum sensitivity autotune, 56relative abundances produced by, 74

Megabore columnsinstalling, 32restrictions on, 18

Monitoring foreline pressure, 42Monitoring vacuum manifold pressure, 46Moving the MSD, 60MS ChemStation. See ChemStationMS error numbers, 69MS temperature, 38, 278

as a function of GC interface temperature, 279relationship to temperatures of analyzer

components, 279too low, 102

MSDaccessories, 6connectors and controls, 314dangerous voltages in the, 163dangerously hot parts in the, 164data system, 6electronics, 289 – 318features, 4

finding air leaks in the, 139hazards from chemical residue, 165interfacing to external devices, 311maintaining the, 159 – 248measuring column flow with the, 54moving the, 60operating the, 35 – 61options, 6storing the, 60troubleshooting the, 63 – 157

NNarrow-bore columns

installing, 24restrictions on, 18

No peaks are present, 84Noise declaration, inside front cover of manual

Noise, excessive and periodic in the mass spectra, 79

OOn/off switch. See Power switchOperating the MSD, 35 – 61Options to the MSD, 6Ordering parts, 320O-rings and O-ring assemblies, 254

part numbers, 326, 341Oxygen, effect on column bleed, 20

iq72.bk : iq72.ix Page 350 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 351: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

Index

351

PPacked columns, restrictions on, 18Part numbers, inside front cover of manual

See also PartsParts, 319 – 341

analyzer, 330circuit breakers, 324clamps, 326consumables, 338electronic, 322external cables, 323ferrules, 339fuses, 324GC interface, 334if you cannot find a part you need, 321internal cables, 322ion source, 332maintenance supplies, 161, 338miscellaneous, 340ordering, 320O-rings and O-ring assemblies, 326, 341printed circuit boards, 324rebuilt assemblies, 320samples, 340seals, 326, 341splitter, 336vacuum system, 326 – 329

Peak widthsadjusting, 76cannot achieve constant, 106inconsistent, 76target, 78too narrow or too wide, 78

Peaksat m/z 18, 28, and 32, 83if none are found, 84, 120

Perfluorotributylamine. See PFTBAPerformance, symptoms of poor, 66

PFTBA, 264adding, 188symptoms of not enough, 123symptoms of too little, 106

Polarityof the mass filter, 285, 297symptoms of selecting incorrect, 75, 89, 93

Power. See Line voltagePower cord

ac, 314foreline pump, 315

Power distribution board, 312block diagram of the, 313dangerous voltage on the, 163replacing the, 245

Power status LED, 317Power supply, 312

dangerous voltages on the, 163replacing the, 247table of expected voltages, 148test points on the main board, 149testing the, 148

Power switch, 315Pre-operation checklist, 36Pressure

indicated vs. absolute, 37, 268monitoring, 37monitoring foreline, 42monitoring vacuum manifold, 46symptoms indicating malfunctions, 67too high, 96too low, 95typical foreline, 43typical vacuum manifold for various carrier

gas flows, 47Pressure gauge

See Foreline gaugeSee Triode gauge

iq72.bk : iq72.ix Page 351 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 352: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

352

Index

Printed circuit boards, part numbers, 324Problems. See Symptoms of malfunctionsPumpdown

data system control of, 36procedure, 40waiting for thermal equilibrium after, 41

QQuadrupole. See Mass filterQuick tune, 56

RRadiator, 278Relative abundance, 92

decreasing for m/z 502, 157lower than expected, 74poor at higher masses, 92produced by max sensitivity autotune, 74produced by standard sensitivity autotune, 74

Repeatability, causes of poor, 90Repeller, 282

ramping to check the ion source, 157symptoms of a short to ground, 86

Resolution, incorrect, 80Restrictor column, installing in the GC

interface, 31, 33RF coils, adjusting the, 240

SSafety

class, inside front cover of manual

during maintenance, 163 – 166general warnings, inside front cover of

manual

Safety covers, 163Samples, 340Scan speed, 81SCINIT command, 145, 147

Sealsvacuum, 254, 326See also O-rings and O-ring assemblies

Sensitivitylow, 88poor at high masses, 92

Septumleaking, 127using a Merlin Mircroseal instead of a, 127

Septum bleed, as a source of contamination, 138Serial number of your MSD, inside front cover of

manual

Service agreements, inside back cover of manual

Setting the GC interface temperaturefrom the ChemStation, 52from the HP 5890 GC keypad, 48from the HP 6890 Series GC keypad, 50

Shipping clamps, 253Shutdown. See VentingSignal, not enough to begin tuning, 122Smartcard. See HP-IB/MS control cardSoftware, different versions for HP 5972A and

HP 6890 Series MSDs, 36Solvent peak, 98Spectra. See Mass spectraSplit tube, 31Splitter

installing in an HP 5890 GC, 26installing in an HP 6890 Series GC, 28part numbers, 336using to reduce flow into the MSD, 20

Standard spectra autotune, 56relative abundances produced by, 74

Startupfailure of the MSD to, 70See also Pumpdown

Static discharge. See Electrostatic discharge

iq72.bk : iq72.ix Page 352 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 353: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

Index

353

Status display, 316analyzer status LED, 317calibration valve status LED, 317power status LED, 317

Storing the MSD, 60Supplies

catalog, 321for MSD maintenance, 162

Switch, power. See Power switchSymptoms of malfunctions

cannot achieve constant peak widths, 106difficulty in the mass filter electronics, 108difficulty with the detector HV supply, 109error messages, 106 – 123general symptoms, 70 – 73if high mass sensitivity is poor, 92if isotopes are missing or isotope ratios are

incorrect, 80if mass assignments are incorrect, 94if mass spectra show excessive, periodic

noise, 79if mass spectra show high background, 82if no peaks are present, 84if peak widths are inconsistent (narrow or

wide peak at m/z 219), 76if peak widths are less than 0.45 amu or

greater than 0.65 amu, 78if repeatability is poor, 90if sensitivity is low, 88if the analyzer temperature is too low, 102if the foreline or vacuum manifold pressure is

too high, 96if the foreline or vacuum manifold pressure is

too low, 95if the gauge controller displays 9.9+9 and then

goes blank, 98

if the GC interface does not heat up, 102if the MSD does not turn on, 70if the MSD is on but the fan is not operating, 71if the MSD is on but the foreline pump is not

operating, 72if the MSD is on but the status LEDs are all

blinking, 73if the power indicator on the gauge controller

does not light, 100if the relative abundance (percentage) of

m/z 502 is lower than expected, 74if there are peaks at m/z 18, 28, and 32, 83mass spectrometer interface card is not

active, 118MS does not respond, 119no peaks found, 120performance symptoms, 74 – 94pressure symptoms, 95 – 101temperature symptoms, 102 – 105the diffusion pump is or was too hot, 110the diffusion pump is too cold, 110the foreline pressure has exceeded

300 mTorr, 116there is no emission current, 121there is not enough signal to begin the

tune, 122Syringe, contaminated, 138System ready signal, 311

iq72.bk : iq72.ix Page 353 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 354: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

354

Index

TTarget tune, 56Tee connector, 27, 29Temperature sensors

in the GC interface, 38locations of the, 278near the ion source, 38

Temperaturescontrolling with the data system, 38monitoring, 68MS temperature as a function of GC interface

temperature, 279symptoms indicating malfunctions, 68

TestingGC and ALS communications, 147HP-IB communications, 144the calibration valve, 152the filaments, 142the HP-IB/MS control card, 145the ion source, 156the power supply, 148

Thermal equilibriumtime to reach, 278waiting for, 41

Thermal switches, 68checking the too cold switch, 113

Thermocouple. See Temperature sensorsTipping the MSD, caution against, 61Too cold, diffusion pump, 112Too hot, diffusion pump, 110Tools, for MSD maintenance, 161Top board, 292

alternate filament relay, 298block diagrams, 294 – 295dc amplifier, 297feedthrough connections, 298high voltage supply, 298RF amplifier, 293thermocouple amplifier, 298

Top plate, 253Transfer line. See GC interfaceTriode gauge, 266

connecting a gauge controller to the, 44inspecting the filament, 98reinstalling the, 200removing the, 198seal, 254turning on the, 46

Triode gauge fitting, correcting a leaking, 133Troubleshooting, 63 – 157

See also Symptoms of malfunctionsTrue total ion (TTI) mode, 297Tune report, 57

using to diagnose a dirty ion source, 156Tuning, 56

cannot begin, 122report generated by, 57the RF coils, 240See also AutotuneSee also the documentation and online help

supplied with your softwareTuning compound, 264Tuning wand, 240Turn on

failure of the MSD to, 70See also Pumpdown

UUltrasonic cleaning of ion source parts, 214

iq72.bk : iq72.ix Page 354 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 355: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

Index

355

VVacuum gauge

See Foreline gaugeSee Triode gauge

Vacuum manifold, 252monitoring pressure in the, 46, 266too high, 96too low, 95

Vacuum manifold pressuremonitoring the, 46, 266typical, 47

Vacuum seals, 254part numbers, 326, 341

Vacuum system, 249 – 269maintaining the, 167maintenance schedule, 160overview, 250part numbers, 326

Vent cycle. See VentingVent program. See VentingVent tube, installing, 26, 28Venting, 58

data system control of, 36foreline pump exhaust, 256

Voltagesdangerous, 163See also Line voltage

Volumetric flow rate, calculating for the column flow, 55

WWarnings, inside front cover of manual

Warranty claims, inside back cover of manual

Warranty, inside back cover of manual

Wide-bore columnsinstalling, 30restrictions on, 18

Wiring, dangerous voltages on the, 163

XX-ray lens, 288

iq72.bk : iq72.ix Page 355 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM

Page 356: 72/6890 MSD Hardware Manual (05972-90026) · Hardware Manual iq72.bk : title Page 3 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM. 4 The HP 5972A and HP 6890 Series ... MSD is designed for use

Warranty

Hewlett-Packard (HP) warrants its Analytical products against defects in materials and workmanship for the warranty period. During the warranty period, HP will, at its option, repair or replace products which prove to be defective. Products that are installed by HP are warranted from the installation date, all others from the date of delivery.

If Buyer schedules or delays installation more than 30 days after delivery, then warranty period starts on 31st day from the date of shipment. For international orders, the grace period is 60 days and the warranty period starts on the 61st day from the date of shipment.

HP software and firmware products which are designated by HP for use with a hardware product, when properly installed on that hardware product, are warranted not to fail to execute their programming instructions due to defects in materials and workmanship. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP shall repair or replace software media and firmware which do not execute their programming instructions due to such defects. HP does not warrant that the operation of the software, firmware or hardware shall be uninterrupted or error free.

Within HP service travel areas, warranty and installation services for products installed by HP and certain other products designated by HP will be performed at Buyer's facility at no charge. For installation and warranty services outside of HP's service travel area, HP will provide a quotation for the applicable additional services.

The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from:

1. Improper or inadequate maintenance, adjustment, calibration or operation by Buyer.

2. Buyer-supplied software, hardware, interfacing or consumables.

3. Unauthorized modifications or misuse.

4. Operation outside of the environmental and electrical specifications for the product.

5. Improper site preparation and maintenance.

6. Customer-induced contamination or leaks.

This warranty may be modified in accordance with the laws of your country. Please consult your local HP office for the period of the warranty, for shipping instructions and for the applicable wording of the local warranty.

Warranty Claims

If physical damage is found, or if operation is not as specified when the instrument is first received, notify the carrier and the nearest Hewlett-Packard office immediately. The HP office will arrange for repair or replacement of the instrument without waiting for settlement of a claim with the carrier. For other than initial inspection warranty claims, contact your local HP office.

Service Agreements

Several service agreements are available, each designed to meet a specific need. In addition to a preventive maintenance agreement, others cover specific repair/maintenance services for the HP 5972A or HP 6890 Series Mass Selective Detector, and can provide for the extension of warranty beyond the initial warranty period.

Details of these agreements, together with prices applicable to the particular installation, can be obtained from your local Hewlett-Packard office.

iq72.bk : inback Page 357 Tuesday, July 11, 1995 10:49 AM